2003 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety.................................................................................................................ii
Your Car at a Glance ...........................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................59
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................121
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................223
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................239
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................271
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................355
Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................363
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................393
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................409
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................413
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index ..................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the car, and should
remain with the car when it is sold.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Accord Coupe. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that
are not on your particular model.
Owner’s Identification
Si prefiere este Manual del
Propietario en español, comuníquese
con el concesionario Honda.
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you
can refer to it at any time.
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps
to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When
your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda dealer’s staff is
specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Honda. Your
Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2003 Honda Accord was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement.
on the car.
how to use this car correctly and safely.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
Instructions
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Main Menu
Your Car at a Glance
2
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM
DIGITAL CLOCK
INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.61)
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.129)
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
(P.108)
(P.86)
(P.103)
(P.225, 91)
(P.226)
(P.243, 245)
(P.248)
(P.153, 171, 193)
(P.148, 163, 187)
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
(P.79)
Main Menu
＊
＊
Only on cars equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.:
Your Car at a Glance
3
HORN
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.74/77)
(P.76)
TILT/TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
(P.80)
EX-V6 model without Navigation System is shown.
CRUISE
CONTROL
BUTTONS
HAZARD
WARNING
LIGHTS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.79)
MOONROOF SWITCH
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.211)
(P.107)
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES
(P.77, 79)
(P.214)
(P.79)
(P.73)
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
(P.259)
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
andchildreninyourcar.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.............Your Car’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
...........................................Airbags . 9
..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 16
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 18
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
........................Protecting Children . 21
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 21
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 22
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to
...............................Children . 22
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 24
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 25
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 26
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 42
.............................Using LATCH . 43
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 46
..Seat Belt System Components . 46
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 47
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 48
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 49
........................SRS Components . 49
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 49
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 51
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 52
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 52
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 53
.............................Airbag Service . 55
...Additional Safety Precautions . 55
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
...................................Safety Labels . 57
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your car is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and
your passengers always wear your
seat belts, and wear them properly.
(See page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
21
16
9
274
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
＊
Your car is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
7
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Seat Belt Tensioners
If equipped:
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
Main Menu
Table of Content
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your car is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your car has airbags.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
Why Wear Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the car and
against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the car.
Your car also has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact.
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with dual-
stage, dual-threshold front airbags to
help protect the heads and chests of
the driver and a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
CONTINUED
Optional on LX model
Standard on EX and all V 6 models
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
Airbags
What you should do:
9
Main Menu
Table of Content
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Your car also has side curtain
airbags. During a moderate to severe
side impact, side curtain airbags help
to protect the heads of the driver,
front seat passenger, and passengers
sitting in the outer rear seating
positions.
Standard on U.S. EX-V6 model
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Car’s Safety Features
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
10
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car’s seats are designed to keep
you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthecar,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the car is
moving.
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the car during a crash. It also helps
prevent occupants from accidentally
opening a door and falling out, and
outsiders from unexpectedly opening
your doors.
Seats & Seat-Backs Head Restraints
Door Locks
What you should do:
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Content
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your car’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
inthebackseat(seepage ).
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Both doors are closed and locked
(see page ).
16
21
14
15
16
13
234
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Car’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
Main Menu
Table of Content
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed and
locked.
Your car has a door monitor light on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door is not tightly
closed.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the car is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the car during a crash.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
38
86
Introduction Close and Lock the Doors1.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Content
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the car.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel. In addition to adjusting the
seat, you can adjust the steering
wheel in and out (see page ).
Also make sure your front seat
passenger moves the seat as far to
the rear as possible.
80
94
Adjust the Front Seats2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Content
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
94
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
99
Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
4. 5.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
46
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
car is parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the car, or
by being struck by an inflating front
airbag. Being struck by an inflating
side airbag can result in possibly
serious injuries.
80
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6. 7.
18
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt
properly.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a car.
Protecting Adults
Advice for Pregnant Women
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Content
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp objects in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
If a
side airbag or a side curtain airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbag inflates.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
On models with side airbags or
side curtain airbags, do not attach
hard objects on or near a door.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
20
Main Menu
Table of Content
(See page
.)
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers.
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
otherchildreninyourcar,besureto
read this section. (See page .)
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
26
38
properly
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed.
21
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
Infants
Never put a rear-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
22
Main Menu
Table of Content
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, in a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
38
CONTINUED
Small Children
Larger Children
U.S. Models
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Content
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your car has warning labels
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Your car has three seating positions
in the back seat where children can
be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
three children in your car:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
18
38
14
16
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Canadian Models
24
Main Menu
Table of Content
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children who play in cars can
accidentally get trapped inside the
trunk and be seriously injured or
could die. Teach your children not
to play in or around cars. Know
how to operate the emergency
trunk opener and decide if your
children should be shown how to
use this feature (see page ).
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
93
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your car is not in use.
Keep car keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
25
Main Menu
Table of Content
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the boxes.
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
30
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants:
2.
1.
26
Main Menu
Table of Content
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your car.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Your car has lower anchors installed
for use with LATCH (Lower
AnchorsandTethersforChildren)-
compatible child seats. For more
information, see page .
34
43
CONTINUED
Small Children:
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Content
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your car.
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see pages and ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a front-
facing child seat (see pages and
).
35
35
31 43
43
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants:
Back Seats
Small children:
Infants:
Small children:
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
Main Menu
Table of Content
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the car during a
crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the car
with the lap part of a lap/shoulder
belt. Some child seats can be
secured to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system instead. A child
whose seat is not properly secured
to the car can be endangered in a
crash. See pages , and for
instructions on how to properly
secure child seats in this car.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
31 35 43
Installing a Child Seat
Storing a Child Seat
Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Properly secure the child seat to
the car.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Content
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
In this car, a rear-facing child seat
can be placed in any seating position
in the back seat, but not in the front
seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant is at least one year
old, reaches the seat maker’s weight
or height limit, and is able to sit up
without support.
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a rear-f acing child seat in
the front seat.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
30
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Content
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
1.
14
15
43
CONTINUED
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
31
Main Menu
Table of Content
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
2.
3.
4.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
32
Main Menu
Table of Content
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
33
Main Menu
Table of Content
A child at least one year old who can
sit up without support, and who fits
within the child seat maker’s weight
and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
In this car, the best place to install a
forward-facing child seat is in one of
the seating positions in the back seat.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Main Menu
Table of Content
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the car, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
1.
43
CONTINUED
Child Seat Installation
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Content
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
2.
3.
4.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Main Menu
Table of Content
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Content
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
We recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
sit in the rear seat, all the way back
against the seat, and put on the seat
belt. Follow the instructions on page
. Then check how the belt fits.16
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Larger Children
38
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible,
uses a booster seat if needed,
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a high or low-
back style that allows the child to be
directly secured with the lap/
shoulder belt.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, and
the lap belt rests over the child’s
hipbones and touches the tops of the
thighs as shown, the child is
probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt
touchesorcrossesthechild’sneck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
This could result in serious neck and
internal injuries during a crash.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Using a Booster SeatDo not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck or over the stomach.
39
Main Menu
Table of Content
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
A child should continue using a
booster seat until the child exceeds
the booster seat manufacturer’s
requirements.
Even then, the child may still need to
use a booster seat. Note that some
states now require children to use
boosters until they reach a certain
ageand/orweight.Besuretocheck
current laws in the state or states
where you intend to drive.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
40
Main Menu
Table of Content
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Remind the child not to lean
toward the door because of the
side airbag.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
16 38
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Physical Size
Maturity
41
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car has three tether anchorage
points under the rear window for
securing a tether-style child seat to
the car.
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available. (Tethers are required in
Canada.)
The tether anchorage points are
located under plastic covers. Pivot
the cover backward to access the
anchorage point.
To use either outside anchorage
point, lift the rear head restraint,
then route the tether strap over the
seat-back between the legs of the
head restraint.
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
COVER
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car is equipped with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
The exact location of each lower
anchor is marked with a small button
above the lower anchor point.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
Move the seat belt buckle or
center seat belt away from the
lower anchors.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Using LATCH
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
LOWER ANCHORS
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Content
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
Put the child seat in the rear left
or right vehicle seat and attach the
child seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
Lift the rear head restraint, then
route the tether strap over the
seat-back between the legs of the
head restraint.
3. 4. 5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
Rigid type
Flexible type
Main Menu
Table of Content
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point, and
tighten the strap according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
This symbol on rear or forward
facing child seats or booster
cushions indicates the presence of
LATCH compatible hardware.
6.
7.
Canadian models only
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lower Universal Anchorage System
Symbol
45
Main Menu
Table of Content
This seat belt has a single belt that
goes over your shoulder, across your
chest and across your hips.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the car,
be sure the belt is out of the way and
will not get closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
31 35
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
46
Main Menu
Table of Content
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
16
52
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
47
Main Menu
Table of Content
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
359
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belt Maintenance
U.S. Models
48
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Emergency backup power in case
your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
Your car is equipped with dual-stage,
dual-threshold airbags to help reduce
the chance of airbag-caused injuries.
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
52
47
CONTINUED
SRS Components How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
49
Main Menu
Table of Content
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
50
Main Menu
Table of Content
In a moderate to severe side impact,
the sensors will detect rapid
deceleration and signal the control
unit to instantly inflate either the
driver’s or the passenger’s side
airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.Some models are equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
U.S. Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
Canadian Owners:
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How Your Side Airbags Work
51
Main Menu
Table of Content
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the car. If the
impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will
inflate even if there are no occupants
on that side of the car.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your front airbags. This light
will also alert you to a potential
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (page ).
Your car is equipped with side
curtain airbags. These airbags are
stored in the front, center, and rear
pillars on both sides. The front and
rear pillars on both sides are marked
‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’
On models with side airbags, this
light will also alert you to a potential
problem with your side airbags, the
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (see page ), or the
side curtain airbags.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
53
47
Standard on U.S. EX-V6 model
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator WorksHow Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
52
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
If you see any of these indications,
your airbags may not deploy, your
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system may not work properly,
or your seat belt tensioners may not
work when you need them. See your
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
53
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Content
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in
the front seat, have the system
checked.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
63
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
54
Main Menu
Table of Content
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your car
serviced if:
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your car to an
authorized Honda dealer as soon
as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
233
Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
55
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon
monoxide gas. You should have no
problem with carbon monoxide
entering the car in normal driving if
you maintain your car properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The car is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
Thecarwasinanaccidentthat
may have damaged the underside. High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
car out of the garage.
With the trunk lid open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your car’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk lid open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked car,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
56
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Content
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which is removed by
the owner), contact your Honda
dealer for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
On models without side airbags
On models with side airbags
On models with side
curtain airbags
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
HOOD
DASHBOARD
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Content
U.S. models
Canadian models
On cars with side curtain airbags
On cars with side airbags
U.S. models Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
58
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
Main Menu
Table of Content
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 60
...............................Indicator Lights . 61
.............................................Gauges . 68
...............................Speedometer . 68
.................................Tachometer . 68
.....................................Odometer . 69
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 69
...................................Trip Meter . 70
...................Temperature Gauge . 70
..................................Fuel Gauge . 70
Maintenance Required
...................................Indicator . 71
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 73
...................................Headlights . 74
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 75
............Daytime Running Lights . 76
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 76
................................Turn Signals . 77
.....................Windshield Wipers . 77
..................Windshield Washers . 79
..........................Hazard Warning . 79
.............Rear Window Defogger . 79
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 80
...............................Keys and Locks . 82
..............................................Keys . 82
....................Immobilizer System . 83
............................Ignition Switch . 84
......................Power Door Locks . 86
...................Remote Transmitter . 87
...........................................Trunk . 91
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 92
....................................Glove Box . 93
............................Seat Adjustments . 94
.............Front Seat Adjustments . 94
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
..............................Adjustment . 95
Driver’s Seat Power Height
..............................Adjustment . 95
Driver’s Seat Power
............................Adjustments . 96
...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 97
........................Rear Seat Access . 98
..........................Head Restraints . 99
.....................Folding Rear Seat . 100
..................................Seat Heaters . 102
............................Power Windows . 103
.......................................Moonroof . 107
...........................................Mirrors . 108
..Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 108
...............................Parking Brake . 110
.................Console Compartment . 111
..........................................Armrest . 111
.........................Beverage Holders . 112
.........................Center CD Pocket . 113
...................................Coin Pocket . 113
........................................Sun Visor . 114
................................Vanity Mirror . 115
......................................Coat Hook . 115
........................Sunglasses Holder . 116
............Accessory Power Sockets . 116
...............................Interior Lights . 117
..............................Ceiling Light . 117
...................................Spotlights . 118
........................Courtesy Lights . 119
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
Control Locations
60
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUDIO SYSTEM
DIGITAL CLOCK
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
(P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
(P.129)
FUEL FILL DOOR/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
(P.108)
(P.86)
(P.103)
(P.225, 91)
(P.226)
(P.79)
(P.153, 171, 193)
(P.148, 163, 187)
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
61
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.62, 379)
(P.62, 380)
(P.381)
(P.63)
(P.66)
(P.62)
(P.66)
(P.66, 213)
(P.63)
(P.63)
(P.65)
(P.71)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR(P.65)
(P.64)
(P.67)
(P.64)
(P.64)
(P.67)
(P.67)
Main Menu
Table of Content
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your car. The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
See page .
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
379
380
381
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Seat Belt Reminder Light
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
62
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator lights briefly when
you turn the ignition switch ON (II).
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.
This indicator lights briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II). If it comes on at any other time,
it indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags or automatic
seat belt tensioners. For complete
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
This light has two functions:
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
1.
2.
53
383
52
Only on models equipped with side
airbags
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
63
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonwhen
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
This indicator normally also comes
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II). If this
lightcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), there is a problem with the
TCS. Take the car to your dealer to
have it checked. See page for
more information on the TCS.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on with the TCS
Activation Indicator, there is a
problem with the TCS. For more
information on the TCS, see page
.
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If this light
comes on at any other time, there is
a problem in the ABS. If this happens,
take the car to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your car
still has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock. For complete information,
see page .
1.
2.
3.
258
258
255
On all V6 models On all V6 models
TCS Activation Indicator Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
64
Main Menu
Table of Content
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signaling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the car should flash.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the trunk or either
door is not closed tightly.
All the lights in the monitor display
come on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
83
346
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Door and Trunk Open Monitor
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0) without turning off the
light switch, this indicator will
remain on. A reminder chime will
also sound when you open the driver’s
door.
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
This indicator lights when the
security system is set. See page
for complete information on the
security system.
213
Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator Security System Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
66
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the Cruise Control System
by pressing the Master Button. (see
page .)
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
76
214
214
306
74
Canadian models onlyCanadian models only
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Content
The gauges illuminate when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Speedometer
Tachometer
68
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
U.S. model is shown.
TRIP METER
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
The odometer and the outside
temperature indicator use the same
display. To switch the display
between the odometer and the
outside temperature, press the
Select/Reset knob. When you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), what
you last selected is displayed.
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your car has been driven. It
measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.
models, and in Centigrade in
Canadian models. To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is located in
the front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road sur-
face, engine heat, and the exhaust
from surrounding traffic. This can
cause an incorrect temperature read-
ing when your speed is under
19 mph (30 km/h).
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
On 4-cylinder EX model with leather
interior and 6-cylinder EX model
Odometer Outside Temperature Indicator
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Content
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise into the
upper half of the gauge. If it reaches
the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the car is on
level ground. It may show slightly
more or less than the actual amount
whenyouaredrivingoncurvyor
hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the odometer/outside
temperature display by pressing the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each
trip meter works independently, so
you can keep track of two different
distances.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), what you last selected is
displayed.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
376
Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
70
Avoid driving with an extremely low
f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your car in for
scheduled maintenance per the
Normal Conditions maintenance
schedule. The indicator light does
not reflect severe maintenance
intervals.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for Normal Driving Conditions on
page (4-cylinder models) or page
(6-cylinder models).
276
284
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
CONTINUED
Maintenance Required Indicator
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
71
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Hold the knob for approximately
ten seconds until the indicator
resets.
Press and hold the Select/Reset
knob in the instrument panel, then
turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Turn off the engine.
1.
2.
3.
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
72
SELECT/RESET KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the moonroof and the
Traction Control System.
The steering wheel adjustment lever
on the underside of the steering
column allows you to tilt and
telescope the steering wheel.
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
73
CRUISE
CONTROLS
TILT/TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
HORN
MOONROOF
SWITCH
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
(P.108)
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
HAZARD
WARNING
LIGHTS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.76)
(P.77, 79)
(P.79)
(P.79)
(P.214)(P.80)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE
AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.74/77)
(P.211)
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
(P.259)
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights, and
rear license plate lights. Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the headlights.
To change from low beams to high
beams, push the turn signal lever
forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will light
(see page ). To return to low
beams, pull the turn signal lever
back.
When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the Lights On
indicator comes on as a reminder.
67
Headlights
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
74
Main Menu
Table of Content
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, parking
lights, taillights and license plate
lights within 15 seconds of removing
the key from the ignition switch and
closing the driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’
or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,
open, then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after ten minutes.
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Content
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off in about 30 seconds after closing
that door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), the
illumination turns off in about 10
seconds.
To reduce glare at night, the instru-
ment panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to or
. Turning the Select/Reset
knob fully to the right until you hear
a click will cancel the reduced bright-
ness.
Instrument Panel BrightnessDaytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
76
SELECT/RESET KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
This lever controls the windshield
wipers and washers. It has five
positions:
MIST: mist
OFF: off
INT: intermittent
LO: low speed
HI: high speed
To select a position, push the lever
up or down.
CONTINUED
Turn Signals Windshield Wipers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
77
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever up from the
OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
This gives you a quick way to clear
the windshield.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. The sweep
interval will change slightly with
speed; getting shorter as you drive
faster. While the car is stopped and
in gear, the wipers sweep the
windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal. In
low speed and high speed, the wipers
run continuously.
You can vary how often the wipers
sweep the windshield by turning the
INT TIME ring on the lever.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
78
Main Menu
Table of Content
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your car is disabled.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light above/in
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition. You have to
turn it on again when you restart the
car.
CONTINUED
Windshield Washers Hazard Warning Rear Window Defogger
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
79
Manual A/C type shown
Main Menu
Table of Content
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
18
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
80
Cars with navigation system
Auto A/C type shown
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
car and be seriously injured in a
crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the car is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
position, making sure the wheel
points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
To adjust the steering wheel:
Insert the key in the ignition
switch, and unlock the steering
column.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your car:
• Ignition
• Driver’s door
•Glovebox
• Trunk release handle
• Rear seat trunk access
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
the tag stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
Your car also comes with two remote
transmitters built into the master
keys; see page for an explanation
of the remote transmitter operation.
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the driver’s door lock.
You can keep the trunk release
handle, rear seat trunk access, and
glove box locked when you leave
your car and the valet key at a
parking facility.
87
Keys
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
82
MASTER
KEY WITH
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GREY)
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
Main Menu
Table of Content
The Immobilizer System protects
your car from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The Immobilizer System indicator
will also blink several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
car’s key and the ignition switch
while trying to start the engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
CONTINUED
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Table of Content
− You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. If your car has
an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must also be in Park. The anti-
theft lock will lock the steering
column when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
LOCK (0)Ignition Switch
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
84
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the car are usable.
Several of the lights on the instru-
ment panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY to ON.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
83
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
85
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Each door has a master door lock
switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks both doors. Push the top of
the switch to lock both doors; push
the bottom to unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab at the top of
the door. When you push down the
lock tab on the driver’s door, both
doors lock. Pulling up the lock tab on
the driver’s door only unlocks that
door. The lock tab on the passenger’s
door only locks and unlocks that
door.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the car, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch and push
the lock tab down or push the top of
the master switch, then close the
door.
Both doors can be locked from the
outsidebyusingthekeyinthe
driver’s door. To unlock just the
driver’s door, turn the key and
releaseit.Ifyouturnthekeyagain,
both doors will unlock.
Youcanopenorclosethewindows
by using the key in the driver’s door
(see page ).106
Power Door Locks
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
86
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
andthekeyintheignition,both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the top of the switch on the
open passenger’s door will lock both
doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pushing down the
lock tab, the tabs on both doors pop
up. Pushing down the lock tab on the
passenger’s door only locks that door.
You can lock and unlock your car
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, both
doors lock. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and lights on
indicator flash once.
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds after
you have locked the doors, you will
hear a beep to verify that the doors
are locked and (if equipped) that the
security system has set.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The passenger’s door unlocks when
you push the button a second time.
The parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights and lights on
indicator flash twice each time you
push the button.
You can also open both power
windows from outside the car with
theremotetransmitter(seepage
).106
CONTINUED
Lockout Prevention
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
87
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
LED
Main Menu
Table of Content
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) and
the spotlights (if the switch is in the
Door position) will come on when
you press the UNLOCK button. If
you do not open either door, the
lights stay on for about 30 seconds,
then fade out. If you relock the doors
with the remote transmitter before
30 seconds have elapsed, the lights
will go off immediately.
You cannot lock the doors with the
remote transmitter if either door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch. You cannot unlock
the doors with the key in the ignition
switch.
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
either door within 30 seconds, the
doors automatically relock and the
security system sets (except for
4-cylinder LX model).
To open the trunk, push the Trunk
Release button for approximately
one second.
The trunk will not open if the key is
in the ignition switch.
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your car’s horn and exterior
lights to attract attention. The horn
sounds and the exterior lights flash
for about 30 seconds. To activate
panic mode, press and hold the
PANIC button for about two seconds.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Panic Mode
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
88
Main Menu
Table of Content
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors, and the
LED will not light. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR1616
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Replacing the Battery
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
89
SCREW
BATTERY
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Content
＋
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your car’s system by
your Honda dealer. Any other
transmitters you have will also need
to be reprogrammed.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
Install the parts in reverse order.
4.
5.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Transmitter Care
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
90
Main Menu
Table of Content
Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
Lock the trunk release handle
with the master key.
Give the person the valet key.
1.
2.
56
234
Trunk
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
91
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
MASTER
KEY
Main Menu
Table of Content
As a safety feature, your car has a
release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see page .25
Emergency Trunk Opener
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
92
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
93
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
To change the angle of the seat-back,
pull up on the lever on the outside of
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back
to the desired position and release
the lever. Let the seat-back latch into
the new position.
All V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EX
model with leather interior have a
power adjustable driver’s seat.
The 4-cylinder EX model without
leather interior has a power seat
bottom height adjustment. All other
driver’s seat adjustments in this
model are manual.
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
The 4-cylinder LX model has manual
driver’s seat adjustments (see next
column).
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
14 15
FrontSeatAdjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
94
Main Menu
Table of Content
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push down the lever
repeatedly.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The height of your driver’s seat is
power adjustable. Pull up on the
switch to raise the seat. Push it down
to lower the seat.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
On 4-cylinder LX model On 4-cylinder EX model without leather
interior
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Driver’s Seat Power Height
Adjustment
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.
Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
The two power seat adjustment
switches are on the outside edge of
the seat bottom. The horizontal
switch adjusts the seat bottom in
several directions. The short vertical
switch adjusts the seat-back angle.
You can adjust the seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder
EX model with leather interior
1514
Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
96
Main Menu
Table of Content
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward to
increase support and backward to
decrease it.
On all EX and EX-V6 models
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Content
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
the release lever up on the side of
the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push downward on
the release lever at the base of the
seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward and the entire seat will move
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder EX
model with leather interior
On LX and EX models
Rear Seat Access
Driver’s Side Passenger’s Side
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
98
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
RELEASE LEVER
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
16
Your car has adjustable head
restraints on the front seats. They
are also on the outside positions of
the rear seat.
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint.Donotattempttoadjustit
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
After a passenger gets into the back
seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position and push the whole
seat backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
CONTINUED
Head Restraints
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
99
RELEASE BUTTON
FRONT
Main Menu
Table of Content
To fold down either side of the seat-
back from inside the car, insert the
master key in the lock on the rear
shelf. To fold down the driver’s side,
turn the key clockwise, pull down the
top of the seat-back, then release the
key. To fold down the passenger’s
side, turn the key counterclockwise
and perform the same procedure.
The back of the rear seat folds down
to give you direct access to the trunk.
Each side folds down separately.
With only half the seat folded, you
can still carry a passenger in the
back seat. The seat-back can be
released from inside the car or inside
the trunk.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
Folding Rear Seat
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
100
REAR
MASTER KEY
Main Menu
Table of Content
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down, then let go of the release.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back whenever the seat-back is in its
upright position.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .56
234
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
101
GUIDE
Pull
CENTER
SHOULDER BELT
Main Menu
Table of Content
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters. Push the
front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.
On EX-V6 model and EX model with
leather interior
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
102
SEAT
HEATER
SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car’s windows are electrically-
powered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) to raise or lower either
window.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it down
until the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
Power Windows
103
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passenger’s window. When you
push in the MAIN switch, the
passenger’s window cannot be raised
or lowered. The MAIN switch does
not affect the driver’s window. To
cancel this feature, push on the
switch again to get it to pop out.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the car so they do
not injure themselves by operating
the window unintentionally.
AUTO
Auto Reverse
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
104
Main Menu
Table of Content
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the driver’s window
fuse is removed, the AUTO function
will be disabled. The power window
system needs to be reset after
reconnecting the battery or installing
the fuse. You should do the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
car checked by a Honda dealer.
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforuptotenminutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either door cancels the
delay function. You must turn the
ignition switch ON (II) again before
you can raise or lower the windows.
1.
2.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
105
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can open both windows from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. Both windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
key.
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
NOTE: If the window stops before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s door unlocks, and
both windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
To open the windows further,
press the button again.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
106
UNLOCK BUTTON
Close
Open
Main Menu
Table of Content
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
( ). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the upper part of the
switch ( ). To open the
moonroof, press and hold the lower
part of the switch ( ). Release
the switch when the moonroof gets
to the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be ON (II).
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. Both windows
starttoclose.Tostopthewindows,
release the key.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
NOTE: If the window stops before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
On all EX and EX-V6 models
Power Windows, Moonroof
Instruments and Controls
Moonroof
107
MOONROOF SWITCH
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment knob on the driver’s door
armrest:
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to ten minutes after
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either door. You must then turn the
ignition ON (II) for the moonroof to
operate.
1.
2.
Instruments and Controls
Mirrors
Moonroof, Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
108
TAB
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Push or pull the adjustment knob
in the appropriate direction to
move the mirror right, left, up, or
down.
When you finish, turn the
adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the knob.
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
3.
4.
On all Canadian models
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
109
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released with the engine running
(see page ).63
Instruments and Controls
Parking Brake
110
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Driving the car with the parking brake
applied can damage the rear brakes
and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Content
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the right lever and lift the
armrest.
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest.
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
To close, lower the armrest and push
it down until it latches. The tray in the console compartment
has a coin holder.
Make sure the passenger’s hands or
fingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
Console Compartment Armrest
Console Compartment, Armrest
Instruments and Controls
111
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT LEVER
LEFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can also damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the side panel.
Beverage Holders
Instruments and Controls
112
DOOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
To open the coin pocket, pull the lid
up.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
The compartment cannot be used as
an ashtray.
To open the center CD pocket, push-
down on the center of the lid to
unlatch it. It will swing open
automatically.
To close it, push the lid down until it
latches.
This pocket can store up to 12 CDs.
On cars without navigation system
Center CD Pocket Coin Pocket
Center CD Pocket, Coin Pocket
Instruments and Controls
113
Push
Main Menu
Table of Content
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the car.
In this position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension. Do not use the sun visor
extension over the rear view mirror.
Do not use the sun visor over the
rear view mirror.
On cars without side curtain airbags
On cars with side curtain airbags
Instruments and Controls
Sun Visor
114
EXTENSION
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The lights beside the mirror come
on when you pull up the cover.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Close it with a firm push.
On cars with side curtain airbags
Instruments and Controls
Vanity Mirror Coat Hook
Vanity Mirror, Coat Hook
115
COAT HOOK
Do not put a coat hanger or
hard objects on a coat hook.
This could result in injuries if
your side curtain airbag inflates.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Your car has two accessory power
sockets, one is located in the front of
the center console, and the other is
in the center console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
To open the socket, pull the cover up.
Sunglasses Holder Accessory Power Sockets
Sunglasses Holder, Accessory Power Sockets
Instruments and Controls
116
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
When both sockets are being used,
the combined power rating of both
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
After both doors are closed tightly,
the light dims slightly, then fades out
in about 30 seconds. In the ON
position, the ceiling light stays on
continuously.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
remote transmitter (see page ).
The light fades out after both doors
are closed.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open either door.
88
CONTINUED
AccessoryPowerSockets,InteriorLights
Instruments and Controls
Ceiling Light
117
OOFFFF
OONN
DOOR ACTIVATED
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
Main Menu
Table of Content
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open with
the key not in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light will go off after three
minutes.
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
Spotlights
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
118
LX and LX-V6 models
EX and EX-V6 models
Main Menu
Table of Content
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your car also has a courtesy light in
the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It fades out in about 30 seconds after
the door is closed.
The spotlights (with the switch in
the DOOR position) also come on
when you unlock the door with the
remote transmitter, and when you
remove the key from the ignition
switch.(See Ceiling Light on page
.)
The spotlights have a two-position
switch. In the DOOR position, the
lights come on when you open either
door. In the OFF position, the lights
do not come on.
117
CONTINUED
On EX and EX-V6 models
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
Courtesy Lights
119
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
DOOR LIGHT
OFF
DOOR
ACTIVATED
Main Menu
Table of Content
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
On EX and EX-V6 models
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
120
COURTESY LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Content
.....................Heating and Cooling . 122
.........What Each Control Does . 122
............How to Use the System . 125
..........To Turn Everything Off . 128
...............Climate Control System . 129
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 131
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 132
......Dual Temperature Control . 137
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 138
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 139
......Dual Temperature Control . 145
Sunlight Sensor/
............Temperature Sensor . 147
.......................Audio System (LX) . 148
....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 148
.................Operating the Radio . 148
.................Adjusting the Sound . 152
..............................Digital Clock . 153
.........Operating the CD Player . 154
.....Operating the CD Changer . 156
....CD Player Error Indications . 158
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 159
Operating the Cassette
....................................Player . 160
...........Tape Search Functions . 161
Audio System
..............(EX, EX-V6, LX-V6) . 163
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio
....................................System . 163
.................Operating the Radio . 164
.................Adjusting the Sound . 169
..............................Digital Clock . 171
.....Operating the CD Changer . 173
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 182
Operating the Cassette
....................................Player . 183
...........Tape Search Functions . 185
Audio System
(U.S. 4-cylinder EX with
leather interior, U.S.
............................EX-V6) . 187
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio
....................................System . 187
.................Operating the Radio . 188
................Adjusting the Sound . 191
.............................Digital Clock . 193
...................Radio Frequencies . 194
.......................Radio Reception . 194
.....Operating the CD Changer . 196
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 204
......Protecting Compact Discs . 205
Operating the Cassette
....................................Player . 206
...........Tape Search Functions . 208
Caring for the Cassette
....................................Player . 210
...........Remote Audio Controls . 211
.......................Theft Protection . 212
............................Security System . 213
...............................Cruise Control . 214
Homelink Wireless Control
........................................System . 218
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Without Navigation System
With Navigation System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
121
Main Menu
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for the best
visibility.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
above the button lights when the
A/C is on.
This button controls the source of air
going into the system. When the
indicator above this button is lit, air
from the car’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the car
(Fresh Air mode).
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).79
On LX, EX and LX-V6 models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button
122
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
MODE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Use the MODE buttons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield,
and the corner vents in the
dashboard. When you select
or , the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
In these two modes, the A/C stays
on with the indicator off.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Mode Buttons
123
Main Menu
Table of Content
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable.
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials underneath them.
To adjust the air flow from each vent,
move the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Vent Controls
124
CENTER VENTS
TABS
Close
Open
TAB
Open
PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT
DRIVER’S SIDE VENT
Close
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
1.
2.
3.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Ventilation
How to Use the System
125
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
MODE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
A/C button. The light above the
button comes on when a fan speed
is selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
If the interior is very warm from
beingparkedinthesun,youcancool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
Start the engine.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
A/C button. Make sure the tem-
perature control dial is turned all
the way to the left.
Set the fan to maximum speed.
Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select the MAX A/C mode.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects and
switches to Recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
126
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
Once the engine is warmed up, this
setting is suitable for all driving
conditions.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. (The indicator above the
A/C button stays off.)
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C turns off.
Butifitwasontostartwith,it
stays on.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
To warm the interior:
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
70
CONTINUED
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Heat and Dehumidify with Air
Conditioning
To Def og and Defrost
To Heat
127
Main Menu
Table of Content
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the side vents with the dial
underneath each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the car has been sitting out in
cold weather:
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C. (The indicator above the
A/C button stays off.)
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
No air flow can cause the windows to
fogup.Itisrecommendedthatyou
keep the fan on at all times so stale
air and moisture do not build up in
the interior and cause fogging.
1.
2.
3.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Turn Everything Off
128
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Thesideventscanbeopenedand
closed with the dials underneath
them.
The automatic climate control
system in your Honda picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
You can adjust the temperatures of
thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side independently (see pages
and ). To adjust the air flow from each vent,
move the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable.
137 145
On 4-cylinder EX model with leather
interior and EX-V6 model only
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
129
CENTER VENTS
TAB
TABS
Close
DRIVER’S SIDE VENT
Open
Main Menu
Table of Content
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
130
PASSENGER’S SIDE VENT
Open
Close
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Content
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button, then set the
desired temperature by turning the
driver’s temperature control dial.
You will see AUTO in the system’s
display.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
CONTINUED
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fully-automatic Operation
Without Navigation System
131
RECIRCULATION BUTTONOFF BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AUTO BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain auto-
matically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
AUTO in the display to go out.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
This button controls the source of air
going into the system. When the
indicator in this button is lit, air from
the car’s interior is sent through the
system again (Recirculation mode).
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from outside the car
(Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
off, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upper
limit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs at
full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the car
has been driven for a short time and
the heater starts to develop warm air.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. No air flow can cause the
windows to fog up. It is
recommended that you keep the fan
on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Semi-automatic Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
132
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲
▼
CONTINUED
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control
buttons: to increase the fan’s
speed, or to decrease the fan’s
speed.
Press the DUAL button to select the
dual temperature control mode (see
page ).
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes; you can turn it off
with the dial below each vent. Each
time you press the MODE button,
the display shows the mode selected.
Press the button four times to see all
the modes.
137
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fan Control Buttons
Mode Button
Dual Button
133
FAN CONTROL BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
134
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Content
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase air flow to the windshield by
closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).79
Rear Window Defogger Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
136
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car is equipped with two
temperature control dials, one for
the driver, and one for the passenger.
Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials when the
green indicator in the DUAL button
is lit.
Push the fan, the A/C, the AUTO, or
the button, and the set
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
turning the driver’s control dial.
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial. To
set the passenger’s side to a
different value than the driver’s side,
turn the passenger’s control dial (see
page ). You can adjust the
passenger’s side without pressing
the DUAL button first.
131
Dual Temperature Control
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Temperature Control Dials
137
PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲
▼
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button will light.
Then set the desired temperature by
pressing the temperature buttons:
to raise the temperature above the
displayed value, or to lower the
temperature.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
With Navigation System
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fully-automatic Operation
138
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in fully automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled. Some of
these functions appear in the
Navigation System display. Press the
A/C button next to the display to
show these functions. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to go
out.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. No air flow can cause the
windows to fog up. It is
recommended that you keep the fan
on at all times so stale air and
moisture do not build up in the
interior and cause fogging.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ‘‘ ’’ or its upper
limit ‘‘ ’’, the system runs at
full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the car
has been driven for a short time and
the heater starts to develop warm air.
CONTINUED
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Semi-automatic Operation
139
Main Menu
Table of Content
Touching ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on
andoff.YouwillseeA/CONorA/C
OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set it below the out-
side temperature. With the A/C off,
use the temperature control buttons
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Air Conditioning (A/C) Icons
140
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) ICONS
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL
ICONS
A/C BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
Use the MODE icons in the display
to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner vents and the side
vents in all modes.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
CONTINUED
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Mode Icons
141
Main Menu
Table of Content
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
142
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can manually select the fan
speed by touching any of the fan
control icons on the display.
This button controls the source of air
going into the system. When the
indicator in this button is lit, air from
the car’s interior is sent through the
system again (Recirculation mode).
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from outside the car
(Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
Press the DUAL button to select the
dual temperature control mode (see
page ).145
CONTINUED
Fan Control Icons
Recirculation Button
Dual Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
RECIRCULATION BUTTONDUAL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase air flow to the windshield by
closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).79
Rear Window Defogger Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
144
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲▼
Your car has four temperature
control buttons on the climate
control panel, two for the driver and
two for the passenger. The driver’s
andpassenger’ssidescanbe
controlled independently by pushing
these buttons when the green
indicator in the DUAL button is lit.
Push AUTO or and the set
temperatures appear in the display.
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
pressing the or buttons on the
driver’s side.
CONTINUED
Dual Temperature Control
Temperature Control Buttons
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
DUAL BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲▼
▲▼
To set the driver’s side temperature
to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then press the or buttons on
the driver’s side. To set the
passenger’s side to a different value
than the driver’s, press the or
buttons on the passenger’s side. You
can adjust the passenger’s side
without pressing the DUAL button
first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
146
DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
Main Menu
Table of Content
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
147
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset bars allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
LX model
AM/FM/CD Audio System
Operating the Radio
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
148
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET
BARS
PWR/VOL
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
−
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
theSEEKbaroneitherthe or
, then release it. Depending on
which side you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and the
side to tune to a lower
frequency. The frequency numbers
will start to change rapidly. Release
the bar when the display reaches the
desired frequency. To change the
frequency in small increments, press
and release the TUNE bar quickly.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset bars.
CONTINUED
SCANSEEK
TUNE
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
To store a frequency:
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the three preset bars.
Each side of the bars (1 6) will
store one frequency on the AM band,
and two frequencies on the FM band.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
bar.
Pick the preset number (1 6)
you want for that station. Press
the left or right side of the bar and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preset
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
150
A.SEL INDICATOR
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET
BARS
TUNE
BAR
A.SEL
BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset bars.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset bars as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you set previously.
When you return home, turn off
Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL
button. The preset bars will then
select the frequencies you originally
set.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset bars (1 6).
You can then use the preset bars to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press the left or
right side of any preset bar that does
not have a station stored.
For information, see page .
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the left or
right side of the proper preset bar to
tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
194
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
Radio Frequencies and Reception
151
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the SOUND button. The mode
changes from BAS to TRE to FAD to
BAL,andthenbacktotheselected
audio mode, each time you press the
SOUND button. Each mode is shown
in the display as it changes.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
SOUND button. Adjust the Balance
or Fader to your liking by turning
the VOLUME knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND
button. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the VOLUME knob.
The level gauge on the display also
shows you the range.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
VOLUME knob.
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
152
VOLUME KNOB
SOUND BUTTON
Adjustment Level LEVEL GAUGE
Main Menu
Table of Content
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the time setting will be
lost. To set the time again, follow the
setting procedure.
The audio system usually shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
To set the time, press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink.
Press and hold the H (Preset 4) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5) side
of the bar until the minutes advance
to the desired time.
Press the Clock Set button
(SOUND) again to enter the set time.
You can use the R (Preset 6) side of
the bar to quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. Press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep, then press the R (Preset 6)
side of the bar. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, pressing R
sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
DIGITAL CLOCK
PRESET BARS
CLOCK SET
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems. You can also
play 3-inch (8-cm) discs without
using an adapter ring. Avoid using
CDs that have adhesive-type labels.
The edges can curl up and cause the
CD to jam in the drive.
Examine the CD for any labels or
other contamination on it that could
causeittojaminthedrive.Withthe
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or ON (II), insert the disc into the
CD slot. Push the disc in halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of the
way and begin to play. The number
of the track that is playing is shown
in the display.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
154
CD/AUX
BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
EJECT
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL
KNOB
RPT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
CONTINUED
This feature, when
activated, samples all the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they
are recorded on the CD. To activate
the Scan feature, select the Scan
mode by pressing the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
track for approximately ten seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then play the following tracks for ten
seconds each. When it plays a track
that you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the sidetomoveforward.Press
the sidetomovebackward.
Release the bar when the system
reaches the point you want.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
SCAN
155
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
＋
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the RDM button. You
will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing RDM again.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) side or Preset 6
(DISC ) side of the preset bar.
Press the Preset 6 side to select the
next disc in the magazine. Press the
Preset 5 side of the bar to select the
previous disc. If you select an empty
slot in the magazine, the changer will,
after finding that slot empty, try to
load the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourcar.Itholdsuptosixor
eight discs, providing several hours
of continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
RANDOM PLAY
156
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
Ifyouejectthediscinthein-dash
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD
changer and begin play where it left
off. If there are no CDs in the
changer, the display will flash. You
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.205
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Protecting Compact Discs
157
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
158
Main Menu
Table of Content
Indication SolutionCause
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the
chart to the right. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the car to
your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine. Check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine. Check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
Magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD Changer
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
159
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
160
CD/AUX
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
NOISE
REDUCTION
INDICATOR
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR PWR/VOL KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲
−
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the Preset 3
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset
bar.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the Preset 4 (NR) side of
the preset bar.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the bar again.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
thePreset3(PLAY/PROG)sideof
the preset bar.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD/AUX button. To
change back to the cassette player,
push the CD/AUX button.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the Preset 1
(REW) side of the preset bar. You
will see REW in the display. To fast
forward the tape, push the Preset 2
(FF) side of the preset bar. You will
see FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,
2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-
tem out of rewind or fast forward.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it reverses direction and
begins to play.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the eject button
on the cassette player.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
161
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
210
Caring f or the Cassette PlayerREPEATSKIP
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
162
Main Menu
Table of Content
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page for CD
changer operation.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset bars allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
173
212
For LX-V6, EX and EX-V6 without
Navigation System
AM/FM/CD Changer
Audio System
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
163
AM/FM BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
PRESET
BARS
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM/FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Radio
164
AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
PRESET
BARS
SEEK BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
EX and LX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−−
CONTINUED
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset bars.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Push the on the TUNE bar to
tune to a higher frequency, or push
the to tune to a lower frequency.
Hold the bar down until the display
reaches the desired frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
the SEEK bar ( or ) until
you hear a beep, then release it.
Depending on which side of the
SEEK bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
TUNE
SEEK SCAN
165
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
−
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the three preset bars.
Each bar will store two frequencies
on the AM band, and four
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
bar.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick the preset number (1 6)
you want for that station. Press
the left or right side of the bar and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the left or
right side of the proper preset bar to
tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset bars (1 6).
You can then use the preset bars to
select those stations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset AUTO SELECT
166
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press the left or
right side of any preset bar that does
not have a station stored.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
167
AM/FM BUTTON A. SEL INDICATOR
A. SEL BUTTON
PRESET
BARS
TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset bars.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset bars as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you set previously.
When you return home, turn off
Auto Select by pressing the A. SEL
button. The preset bars will then
select the frequencies you originally
set.
For information, see page .194
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Radio Frequencies and Reception
168
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
EX and LX-V6
AM/FM
BUTTON
A.SEL INDICATOR
PRESET
BARS
TUNE BAR
A. SEL
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the SOUND button, then turn the
VOLUME knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFAdtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
SOUND button.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND
button. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the VOLUME knob.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAd adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
CONTINUED
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
169
VOLUME KNOB
Adjustment Level LEVEL GAUGE
SOUND
BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The level gauge on the display also
shows you the range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
VOLUME knob.
Select BAL or FAd by pressing the
SOUND button. Adjust the Balance
or Fader to your liking by turning
the VOLUME knob.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
170
EX and LX-V6
LEVEL GAUGEAdjustment Level
VOLUME KNOB
SOUND
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
The audio system usually shows the
time when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
To set the time, press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink.
Press and hold the H (Preset 4) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time.
Press and hold the M (Preset 5) side
of the bar until the minutes advance
to the desired time.
Press the Clock Set button
(SOUND) again to enter the set time.
CONTINUED
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
171
PRESET BARS
DIGITAL CLOCK
CLOCK SET BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the time setting will be
lost. To set the time again, follow the
setting procedure.
You can use the R (Preset 6) side of
the bar to quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. Press the Clock Set
button (SOUND) until you hear a
beep, then press the R (Preset 6)
side of the bar. If the displayed time
is before the half hour, pressing R
sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
172
EX and LX-V6
DIGITAL CLOCK
CLOCK SET BUTTON
PRESET BARS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda’s audio system has an
in-dash CD changer that holds up to
six discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
Avoid using CDs that have adhesive-
type labels. The edges can curl up
and cause the CD to jam in the drive.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
CONTINUED
Operating the CD Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
173
RPT BUTTONDISC AND TRACK
NUMBERS
CD BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
RDM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
To load a single CD:
Press and release the LOAD
button.
The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.
The disc number for an empty
position starts to blink and the
green CD load indicator comes on.
When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
display, insert the disc into the CD
slot. Insert it only about halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way.
Insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
Ontheuppersideofthedisplay,
the disc number for an empty
position will begin blinking and the
green CD load indicator will come
on.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAd’’ in the display, then
release the button.
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, the system will begin
playing the last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
press the LOAD button, the system
will wait for ten seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Loading CDs in the Changer
174
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate side of a
preset bar. Select an empty position
(the disc number indicator is off),
and press the left or right side of the
preset bar for that position (1 to 6).
The system will stop playing the
current CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
175
LOAD BUTTON
EX and LX-V6
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
CD BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR RPT BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar (1
6). If you select an empty position in
the CD changer, the system will go
into the loading sequence (see page
).
Each time you press and
release it, the system skips forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press and release to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press and release it
again to skip to the beginning of the
previous track.
You can use the SKIP bar while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheleftorrightsideofthe
SKIP bar. You will hear a beep and
the system will continue to move.
Press to move forward, or
to move backward. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
This feature, when
activated, samples all the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they
are recorded on the CD. To activate
the Scan feature, select the Scan
mode by pressing the SCAN button.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will then play the first
track for approximately ten seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then play the following tracks for ten
seconds each. When it plays a track
that you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button again.
174
Operation
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN
176
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
CONTINUED
This feature, when
activated, samples each first track of
all the discs in the CD changer in the
order they are stored. To activate
the Scan feature, select the D-Scan
mode by pressing and holding the
SCAN button. You will see D-SCAN
in the display. The system will then
play the first track of the first CD for
approximately ten seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
then play the next CD’s first track.
When it plays a disc that you want to
continue listening to, press the
SCAN button again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
D-SCAN
177
RDM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTONLOAD BUTTON
PRESET BARS
CD BUTTON
SCAN INDICATOR
RPT BUTTON
RDM INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
SKIP BAR
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
− To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display as a reminder. The system
continuously replays the current
track. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing either side of the
SKIP or TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
178
RDM BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
PRESET BARS
CD BUTTON
SCAN INDICATOR
RPT BUTTON
RDM INDICATOR
RPT INDICATORSKIP BAR
EX and LX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
CONTINUED
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button. Each time
you press the AM/FM button, the
system will change to the next mode;
FM1, FM2 or AM. When you return
to CD mode by pressing the CD
button, play will continue at the same
point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
This feature, when
activated, replays all the tracks on
the selected disc in the order they
are recorded on the CD. To activate
the disc repeat feature, select the D-
Repeat mode by pressing and
holding the RPT button. You will see
D-RPT in the display. The system
continuously replays the current CD.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off. Pressing either side of the SKIP
or TUNE bar also turns off the
repeat feature.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks
within a CD in random order, rather
than in the order they are recorded
on the CD. To activate Random Play,
press the RDM button. You will see
RDM in the display. The system will
then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
RandomPlaybypressingtheRDM
button again, or you select a
different CD with a preset bar.
Audio System
D-REPEAT RANDOM PLAY
Comfort and Convenience Features
179
Main Menu
Table of Content
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, after 15
seconds, the system selects the
previous mode (AM, FM1, or FM2).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds, and select the
previous mode (AM or FM). To
begin playing the disc, press the CD
button.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththeleftor
right side of the appropriate preset
bar. When that CD begins playing,
press the eject button.
Removing CDs from the Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
180
CD SLOT
CD
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
EJECT BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you press the eject button while
listening to the radio, or with the
audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject all six discs, one at a time.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.205
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Protecting Compact Discs
181
CD
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL KNOB
EX and LX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
Indication SolutionCause
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
Insert CDs.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
No CD in the CD
Changer
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
182
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
CONTINUED
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
183
RPT
BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORAM/FM BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR PWR/VOL KNOB
EX with leather interior and EX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the Preset 3
(PLAY/PROG) side of the preset
bar.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the Preset 4 (NR) side of
the preset bar.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
184
RPT
BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR PWR/VOL KNOB
NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
EX and LX-V6
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
The Skip function allows
youtofindthebeginningofasong
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the Preset 1
(REW) side of the preset bar. You
will see REW in the display. To fast
forward the tape, push the Preset 2
(FF) side of the preset bar. You will
see FF displayed. Press the Preset 1,
2, or 3 side of the bars to take the sys-
tem out of rewind or fast forward.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it reverses direction and
begins to play.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the eject button
on the cassette player.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
thePreset3(PLAY/PROG)sideof
the preset bar.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD/AUX button. To
change back to the cassette player,
push the CD/AUX button.
CONTINUED
SKIP
FF/REW
Tape Search Functions
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
185
Main Menu
Table of Content
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
210
REPEAT Caring f or the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
186
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset icons in the
Navigation System display allow you
to easily select your favorite stations.
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page for CD
changer operation.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
196
212
AM/FM/CD Changer
Audio System
With Navigation System
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
187
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK BAR
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AUTO
SELECT ICON
SCAN ICON
UPPER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
PRESET
ICONS
TUNE/MODE
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob, the AM/FM button, or
the AUDIO DISPLAY button. Adjust
the volume by turning the PWR/
VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
seen in the upper display if the
stationisbroadcastinginstereo.
Stereo reproduction on AM is not
available.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset icons.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, push and release the
SCAN button on the driver’s side of
the audio display or touch the SCAN
icon at the bottom of the display.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan up the band for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for approximately five
seconds. If you do nothing, the
system will then scan for the next
strong station and play that for five
seconds. When it plays a station that
you want to continue listening to,
press the SCAN button or touch the
SCAN icon again.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob to the right to tune to
a higher frequency, or to the left to
tune to a lower frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
the SEEK bar ( or ) until
you hear a beep, then release it.
Depending on which side of the
SEEK bar you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
Operating the Radio SCAN
TUNE
SEEK
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
188
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
CONTINUED
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset icons. Each
icon will store one frequency on the
AM band, and two frequencies on
the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
to view the audio display. You will
see the six preset icons.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
icon.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick the preset icon (1 6) you
want for that station. Touch the
icon, and hold it until you hear a
beep.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply touch the proper preset icon
to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, touch the
Auto Select icon on the display. The
A.SEL indicator will flash in the
upper display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset icons. You can
then use the preset icons to select
those stations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Preset AUTO SELECT
189
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will not see a
station number on the corresponding
preset icon.
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset icons.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset icons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by touching the
AUTO SELECT icon. The preset
icons will then select the frequencies
you originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
190
AM/FM BUTTON
UPPER
DISPLAY
PWR/VOL KNOB
A.SEL INDICATOR
SCAN ICON
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT
ICON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
PRESET
ICONS
TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
To adjust the bass
and treble, touch the or
arrows next to the BASS or
TRE icons. The adjustment bar
above each button shows you the
current setting.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. To adjust them,
enter the sound grid by touching the
SOUNDicononthedisplayor
pressing the TUNE knob.
CONTINUED
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
191
BASS ADJUST
ICONS
TREBLE ADJUST
ICONS
RETURN
ICON
BALANCE
ADJUST
ICONS
SOUND
GRID
FADER
ADJUST
ICONS
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Content
To adjust the balance, touch the left
or right arrows on the sound grid.
When you touch an arrow, the pink
bars on the grid move toward it,
changing the balance left or right. To
equalize the balance, touch the left
or right arrow until each side has a
pink bar at the center of the sound
grid.
To adjust the fader, touch the front
or rear arrows on the sound grid.
When you touch an arrow, the blue
bars on the grid move toward it,
changing the fader to the front or
rear. To equalize the fader, touch the
front or rear arrow until each side
has a blue bar at the center of the
sound grid.
To see the audio screen when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
touch the RETURN icon or wait five
seconds.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
192
DIGITAL CLOCK
UPPER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SOUND
ICON
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you want to adjust the sound while
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
To return to the previous display,
push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
again.
The upper display shows the time
when the ignition switch is in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). The
Navigation System receives signals
from the Global Positioning System
(GPS), and the displayed time is
updated automatically by the GPS.
Refer to the Navigation System
Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
Digital Clock
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
193
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
194
Main Menu
Table of Content
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
195
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda’s audio system has an
in-dash CD changer that holds up to
six discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
Avoid using CDs that have adhesive-
type labels. The edges can curl up
and cause the CD to jam in the drive.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Operating the CD Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
196
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD SLOT
UPPER DISPLAY
CD/AUX
BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
DISC BAR
CD LOAD
INDICATOR
EJECT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
To load a single CD:
Press and release the LOAD
button.
The disc number icon for an
empty position is highlighted on
the Navigation System display and
the green CD load indicator comes
on. When you see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
upper display, insert the disc into
the CD slot. Insert it only about
halfway; the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way.
The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.
When ‘‘LOAd’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next disc
into the CD slot.
Insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD load indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAd’’ in the upper display, then
release the button.
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for ten seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Loading CDs in the Changer
197
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
If you press the LOAD button while
a CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
touching the appropriate disc icon.
Select an empty position (the disc
icon below the disc number is dark),
and touch the icon for that position
(1 6). The system will stop playing
the current CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
198
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
DISC ICONS
DISC NUMBER
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
CD SLOT
LOAD
BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
EJECT
BUTTON
DISC BAR
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
▲
▼
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD/AUX button. You will see
‘‘CD’’ in the upper display. The
system will begin playing the last
selected disc in the CD changer. You
will see the disc and track numbers
displayed.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
Each time you press and release the
top of the SKIP bar, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release the
bottom toskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the top or bottom of the
SKIP bar. You will hear a beep and
the system will continue to move
through the track. Press to
move forward, or to move
backward. Release the bar when the
system reaches the point you want.
To select a different disc, touch the
appropriate disc icon (1 6) or
press the upper side ( ) or the
lower side ( ) of the DISC bar next
to the audio display. If you select an
empty position in the CD changer,
the system will go into the loading
sequence (see page ).
You can use the SKIP bar while a
disc is playing to select passages and
change tracks.
When you touch the TRACK SCAN
icon on the audio display or press the
SCAN button next to the display, the
first track of the current CD plays
for about 10 seconds. You will see
TRACK SCAN in the display (or
SCAN in the upper display). To hear
the rest of the track, touch TRACK
SCAN or press SCAN button again,
within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the
system advances to the next track,
plays about 10 seconds of it, and
continues through the rest of the
tracks the same way.
197
CONTINUED
Operation
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Track Scan
199
Main Menu
Table of Content
When you touch the DISC SCAN
icon on the audio display, the first
track of the current CD plays for
about 10 seconds. You will see DISC
SCAN in the display (or D-SCAN in
the upper display). To hear the rest
of the CD, touch DISC SCAN again,
within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the
system advances to the next CD,
plays about 10 seconds of its first
track, and continues through the rest
oftheCDsthesameway.
When you touch the TRACK RPT
icon on the audio display, the system
continuously replays the current
track. As a reminder, you will see
TRACK REPEAT in the display (or
RPT in the upper display). To turn
this feature off, touch TRACK
REPEAT again.
When you touch the DISC RPT icon
on the audio display, the system
continuously replays the current CD.
As a reminder, you will see DISC
REPEAT in the display (or D-RPT in
the upper display). To turn this
feature off, touch Disc RPT again.
When you touch the RANDOM icon
on the audio display, the system
plays the tracks of the current CD in
random order, rather than in the
order they were recorded. As a
reminder, you will see TRACK
RANDOM in the display (or RDM in
the upper display). To turn this
feature off, touch RANDOM again,
or select a different CD with one of
the disc icons.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Disc Scan Track Repeat
Disc Repeat
Random Play
200
Main Menu
Table of Content
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button. Each time
you press the AM/FM button, the
system changes to the next mode
(AM, FM1, or FM2). When you
return to CD mode by pressing the
CD button, play will continue at the
same point that it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
201
AM/FM
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD BUTTON
SCAN
BUTTON
DISC
ICONS
Main Menu
Table of Content
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the upper and
audio displays. When you remove
the disc from the slot, the system
automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
load another CD, after 15 seconds,
the system selects the previous
mode (AM, FM1, or FM2).
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after 15 seconds and put the CD
changer in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate disc icon or the DISC bar.
When that CD begins playing, press
the eject button.
Removing CDs from the Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
202
CD SLOT
DISC BAR
EJECT
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
If you press the eject button while
listening to the radio, or with the
audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the eject button again will eject the
next disc in numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off by pressing the
eject button. The disc that was last
selected is ejected first. You can
eject all six discs, one at a time.
205
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
203
Main Menu
Table of Content
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
upper display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
SolutionCause
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
204
Main Menu
Table of Content
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These and contamination from
fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens
can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
205
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
auto-reverse for continuous play.
To operate the cassette player, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II). Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
206
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
AM/FM
BUTTON
CH/DISC
BAR
RPT ICON NR ICONPLAY/PROG
ICON
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATORRPT INDICATOR
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise reduc-
tion, push the AUDIO DISPLAY
button to change to the audio display,
and turn it off by touching the NR
icon on the display.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the icon again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the eject button
on the cassette player.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD/AUX button. To
change back to the cassette player,
push the CD/AUX button.
The tape direction indicator will light
on the upper display to show you
which side of the cassette is playing.
The indicates the side you
inserted facing upward is now
playing. If you want to play the other
side, push the AUDIO DISPLAY
button to change to the audio display,
and touch the PLAY/PROG icon.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, push
the AUDIO DISPLAY button to
change to the audio display, and
touch the PLAY/PROG icon.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
207
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
▲
▼
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
The Skip function allows
youtofindthebeginningofasong
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will be shown in
the upper display as the tape moves.
When the system reaches the
beginning of the next song or
passage (FF), or the beginning of
thecurrentone(REW),itgoesback
to PLAY mode.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the upper side
( ) of the CH DISC bar. You will
seeREWinthedisplay.Tofastfor-
ward the tape, push the lower side
( ) of the CH DISC bar. You will
see FF displayed. Press either side of
the CH DISC bar or touch the
PLAY/PROGiconintheaudio
display to take the system out of re-
wind or fast forward. When the sys-
tem reaches the end of the tape, it
reverses direction and begins to play.
Tape Search Functions SKIPFF/REW
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
208
Main Menu
Table of Content
− The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the AUDIO
DISPLAY button to change to the
audio display, and touch the RPT
icon in the display to activate it; you
will see RPT displayed in the upper
display as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by touching the
icon again.
REPEAT
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
209
Main Menu
Table of Content
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ flashing on the display,
press the TAPE eject button to
remove the cassette from the unit.
Make sure the tape is not damaged.
If the cassette will not eject or the
error indication stays on after the
cassette ejects, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ on the upper display,
press the TAPE eject button to
remove the cassette from the unit.
Make sure the tape is not damaged.
If the cassette will not eject or the
error indication stays on after the
cassette ejects, take the car to your
Honda dealer.
On Audio system with Navigation
System
On Audio systems without Navigation
System
Caring f or the Cassette Player
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
210
Main Menu
Table of Content
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a cassette
(if equipped).
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
number in the display.
Ifyouareplayingatapeinthe
optional cassette player, press the
top ( ) of the CH button to advance
to the next selection. Press the
bottom( )togobacktothe
previous selection. The system
senses a silent period, then goes
back to play mode.
On all EX and V6 models
Remote Audio Controls
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
211
CH BUTTON
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
Your car’s audio system will disable
itself if it is disconnected from
electrical power for any reason. To
make it work again, the user must
enter a specific code using the preset
bars or the TUNE knob. Because
there are hundreds of number
combinations possible, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
When all the digits in the code are
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for one hour before
trying again.
If your car is equipped with a
navigation system, press and release
the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’
appears on the display.
You will have to store your favorite
stations on each side of the preset
bars (1 6) after the system begins
working. Your original settings were
lost when power was disconnected.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the radio fuse is
removed, the audio system will
disable itself. If this happens, you
will see ‘‘ ’’/‘‘ ’’ in the
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the preset
bars to enter the code.
If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your
code, turn the TUNE knob left or
right until the first digit is
displayed. Press and release the
TUNE knob to store it. Enter the
remaining digits the same way.
If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,
press and release the TUNE knob
to store it.
On EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 models
Theft Protection
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
212
Main Menu
Table of Content
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Once the security system is set,
opening either door (without using
the key or the remote transmitter),
the hood, or the trunk will cause it to
sound. It also sounds if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release handle
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
Monitor on the instrument panel
(see page ), to see if the doors
and trunk are fully closed. Since it is
notpartofthemonitordisplay,
manually check the hood.
The security system helps to protect
your car and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
carorremovetheradio.Thisalarm
continues for two minutes, then the
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the two minutes have
elapsed, unlock the driver’s door
with the key or the remote
transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
65
On all models except for 4-cylinder LX
model
Security System
Comfort and Convenience Features
213
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE MAIN light on the
instrument panel comes on.
Press and release the DECEL/
SET button on the steering wheel.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on
the instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the car under
those conditions.
The cruise control may not hold the
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
1.
2.
3.Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
214
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Content
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. The car will accelerate.
When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the DECEL/SET
button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button repeatedly. Each
time you do this, your car will
speed up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. The car will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your car will slow down
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the DECEL/SET
button. The car will then maintain
the desired speed.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The car
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal will cause the cruise
control to cancel.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
215
Main Menu
Table of Content
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out and the
car will begin to slow down. You can
use the accelerator pedal in the
normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light comes
on, and the car will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Press the Cruise Control Master
button on the steering wheel.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
button turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Using the
Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
216
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. Garage door
openers manufactured before that
date do not have a safety feature that
causes them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your car’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
The HomeLink Wireless Control
System built into your car can be
programmed to operate remotely-
controlled devices around your home,
such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems. It can
replaceuptothreeremote
transmitters.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Wireless Control
System, or would like information on
home products that can be operated
by the transmitter, call (800) 355-
3515. On the Internet, go to www.
homelink.com.
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information, you
should contact the manufacturer of
the equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote control
transmitter for the device (garage
door, automatic gate, security
system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
While training or using HomeLink,
make sure you have a clear view of
the garage door or gate, and that no
one will be injured by its movement.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
On EX-V6 model
Important Safety Precautions
Customer Assistance
General Information
HomeLink Wireless Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
217
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
Before you can use HomeLink to
operate devices around your home, it
must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train HomeLink to open
and close the garage door:
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red light in HomeLink.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press the button on the remote
control and the button on
HomeLink at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
If you just took
delivery of your car and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on HomeLink for about 20
seconds, until the red light flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
Step 1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Wireless Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
218
Main Menu
Table of Content
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so they send and
receive the correct codes.
The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
The remote control you are training
may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
HomeLink to learn the code. Release
and press the button on the remote
control every two seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it. It should
operate the garage door.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink button
you just trained. If the red light
blinks for two seconds, then stays
on, you have a rolling code garage
door opener. You may be able to
verify this with the manufacturer’s
documentation. Go to ‘‘Training
With a Rolling Code System.’’
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotely-
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
5.
6.
8.
7.
CONTINUED
Canadian Owners:
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Wireless Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
219
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
Itmaybehelpfultohavesomeone
assist you with this procedure.
Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 4 seconds.
(The same button you trained with
the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure.)
Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
light on the garage door opener
unit. (Some systems may require
youtopressthebuttonuptothree
times.)
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
HomeLink Wireless Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
220
TRAINING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the car.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, place the
remotecontrolforthedevice2to
5inchesfromHomeLink.
Release both buttons. HomeLink
should now be trained to operate
the device.
Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
Totrainanalreadyprogrammed
HomeLink button to operate a new
device:
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
HomeLink buttons, press and hold
the two outside buttons until the red
light begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.Retraining a Button
Erasing Codes
HomeLink Wireless Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
221
Main Menu
Table of Content
222
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your car,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 224
.........................................Gasoline . 224
.........Service Station Procedures . 225
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 225
....................Opening the Hood . 226
...............................Oil Check . 228
.........Engine Coolant Check . 230
...............................Fuel Economy . 231
............................Car Condition . 231
...........................Driving Habits . 231
...Accessories and Modifications . 232
.............................Carrying Cargo . 234
Before Driving
Before Driving
223
Main Menu
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Help assure your car’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
If you drive with the low engine
speed (below than about 1,000 rpm),
you may feel the engine knocking. In
this case, you can use premium
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 91 or higher to
prevent the engine from knocking.
On EX-V6 with manual transmission
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
Break-in Period, Gasoline
224
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the fuel fill door by pushing
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
tether end attachment on the fuel
fill cap into the slot on the fuel fill
door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there
maybeaproblemwiththissystem.
Consult your dealer.
3.
4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Filling the Fuel Tank
225
FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER
Push
ATTACHMENT
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Standing in front of the vehicle,
reach in between the hood and the
front grille with your finger. The
hood latch handle is above and to
the left of the ‘‘H’’ logo. Push this
handle up until it releases the
hood. Lift the hood.
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
1. 2.
5.
381
6.
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
226
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
LATCH
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
uptherestofthewayandholdit
up.
To close the hood, lower it to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip and insert the
end into the hole on the front of
the hood around the center.
3.
318
6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
Before Driving
Service Station Procedures
227
GRIP
CLIP
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few
minutes after turning the engine off
before you check the oil.
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle/loop).
1.
2.
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Oil Check
228
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
DIPSTICK
(Orange Handle)
DIPSTICK
(Orange Loop)
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Insert it all the way back in its tube. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
3. 4.
294
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Adding Oil
229
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
4-cylinder models
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Main Menu
Table of Content
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
299
291
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Adding
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant Check
230
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
RESERVE TANK
4-cylinder models
MIN
MAX
MAX
RESERVE TANK
6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models
Main Menu
Table of Content
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
The condition of your car and your
driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Always maintain your car according
to the maintenance schedule. This
will keep it in top operating condition.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your car uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and reduces
thechanceofcorrosion.
291
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Car Condition
Fuel Economy
Before Driving
231
Main Menu
Table of Content
Modifying your car, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your car unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your car’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your car.
These accessories have been
designed and approved for your car,
and are covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your car, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your car’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page for
additional information.)
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your car’s electrical system capacity,
they can interfere with the operation
of your car, or even cause the
airbags to deploy.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper car operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
233
386
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
232
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
car’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the car and
hurt someone.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Honda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Some examples are:
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to impact speed
bumps or other raised objects,
which could cause the airbags to
deploy.
Raising the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
On models equipped with side airbags or
side curtain airbags
Modifications
Additional Safety Precautions
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
233
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The trunk is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the back
seatcanbefoldeddowntoallowyou
to carry more cargo or longer items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
234
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
TRUNK
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
DOOR POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
Main Menu
Table of Content
×
−
Following are the steps for
determining the correct cargo and
luggage load limit.
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850 lbs
(395 kg)’’ on your car’s placard (on
the driver’s doorjamb).
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 lbs (395 kg).
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
If your car will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your car. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your car.
The maximum load limit for your car
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, accessories, and
the tongue weight if you are towing a
trailer.
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your car. (Five is
the seating capacity of your car.)
For example, if there will be four 150
lbs(70kg)occupantsinyourcar,the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115
kg).
4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280
kg)
850 lbs (395 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =
250 lbs (115 kg)
Determine the combined weight
of accessories, luggage, and cargo
beingloadedinthecar.The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4 [250
lbs(115kg)inthisexample].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
235
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the car during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the car
during a crash.
If you can carry any items on a
roof rack, be sure the total weight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Honda
dealer for further information.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
56
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Top Carrier
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
236
Main Menu
Table of Content
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo
net,storeitinthesparetirewell.
There are hooks on the floor and
sides of the trunk. They can be used
to install a net for securing items.
On all EX and EX-V6 models
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
Cargo NetTrunk Hooks
237
Main Menu
Table of Content
238
Main Menu
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
5-speed/6-speed manual and
automatic transmissions. It also
includes important information on
parking your car, the braking system,
the Traction Control System, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 240
.......................Starting the Engine . 241
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 242
....5-speed Manual Transmission . 243
.....Recommended Shift Points . 244
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 244
....6-speed Manual Transmission . 245
.....Recommended Shift Points . 246
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 246
.......................Reverse Lockout . 246
..............Automatic Transmission . 248
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248
................Shift Lever Positions . 248
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 251
....................Shift Lock Release . 251
...........................................Parking . 253
..............................Parking Tips . 253
.....................The Braking System . 254
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 254
...............Brake System Design . 255
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 255
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 256
........................ABS Indicator . 256
..............Traction Control System . 258
...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 259
.........TCSActivationIndicator .259
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 261
...........................Towing a Trailer . 263
Driving
Driving
239
Main Menu
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your car.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
10.
16
61
94
108
80
241
Preparing to Drive
Driving
240
Main Menu
Table of Content
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. START (III) does not
function unless the clutch pedal is
depressed.
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission:
Manual Transmission:
Starting the Engine
Driving
241
Main Menu
Table of Content
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet
(2,400 meters) adds to the problem.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1.
2.
3.
Driving
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
Starting the Engine
242
Main Menu
Table of Content
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the car moving. Push
down the clutch pedal, and pause for
a few seconds before shifting into
Reverse, or shift into one of the
forward gears for a moment. This
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
The manual transmission is syn-
chronizedinallforwardgearsfor
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from Fifth
to Reverse. When shifting up or
down,makesureyoupushtheclutch
pedal down all the way, shift to the
next gear, and let the pedal up
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
On all 4-cylinder models
Driving
5-speed Manual Transmission
243
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (25 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (65 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Cruise acceleration
7mph(11km/h)
22 mph (35 km/h)
33 mph (53 km/h)
48 mph (77 km/h)
Driving
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter
5-speed Manual Transmission
244
Main Menu
Table of Content
The manual transmission is synchro-
nizedinallforwardgearsforsmooth
operation. It has a lockout so you
cannot shift directly from Fifth to
Reverse instead of Sixth (see page
). When shifting up or down,
make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
When you are not shifting, do not
rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
This can cause your clutch to wear
out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
Reverse with the car moving. Push
down the clutch pedal, and pause for
a few seconds before shifting into
Reverse, or shift into one of the
forward gears for a moment. This
stops the gears so they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure engine speed will not go
into the tachometer’s red zone in the
lower gear.
Your car is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
car parked outside for a long time on
a hot day, be careful before moving
the shift lever. Because of the heat,
the shift lever may be extremely hot.
If the outside temperature is low, the
shift lever feels cold.
246
On EX-V6 model
6-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
245
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you the best
fuel economy and effective emis-
sions control. The following shift
points are recommended:
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (75 km/h)
52 mph (83 km/h)
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
The 6-speed manual transmission
has an electric lockout so you cannot
accidentally shift from Fifth to
Reverse instead of Sixth while the
car is moving. If you cannot shift to
Reverse when the car is stopped:
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
6-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
246
Main Menu
Table of Content
With the clutch pedal depressed,
move the shift lever to the First/
Second gear side of the Neutral
gate, then shift to Reverse.
If you are still unable to shift to
Reverse, apply the parking brake
and turn the ignition key to
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Depress the clutch pedal and shift
to Reverse.
With the clutch pedal still de-
pressed, start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to Reverse, your car may be
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Honda dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-speed Manual Transmission
Driving
247
Main Menu
Table of Content
The shift lever has seven positions.
It must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on
the brake pedal, and keep your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission. Avoid
rapid acceleration and have the trans-
mission checked by an authorized
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator
if there is a problem in the automatic
transmission control system.
This indicator between the tacho-
meter and speedometer shows which
position the shift lever is in.
Your Honda’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
3
Shift Lever Positions
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Automatic Transmission
Driving
248
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Press the release button
before shifting into Reverse from
Neutral.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
button on the side of the shift lever
to move it.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
251
CONTINUED
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
Reverse (R)
Park (P)
Automatic Transmission
Driving
249
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−−
−
To shift to Second,
pressthereleasebuttonontheside
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
To shift from Second to
First, press the release button on the
side of the shift lever. With the lever
in this position, the transmission
locks in First gear. By upshifting and
downshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,
you can operate this transmission
much like a manual transmission
without a clutch pedal.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected instead of all five.
Use D when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D can
also keep the transmission from
cycling between third and fourth
gears in stop-and-go driving.
Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the car for
any reason. Press on the brake pedal
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear (1 through 5) for your speed
and acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one,
two or three gears, depending on
your speed.
3
3
3
3
Second (2)
First (1)
Drive (D )Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
250
Main Menu
Table of Content
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the Parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
theshiftlever.Useasmallflat-
tipped screwdriver or small metal
plate (neither are included in the
tool kit) to remove the cover.
Carefully pry off the edge of the
cover.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter
Automatic Transmission
Driving
251
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then reinstall
thecover.Makesurethenotchon
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Honda dealer.
5.
6.
4.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
252
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your car. The indicator on
the instrument panel shows that the
parking brake is not fully released; it
does not indicate that the parking
brakeisfirmlyset.Makesurethe
parking brake is set firmly or your
car may roll if it is parked on an
incline.
If your car has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park.Thiskeepsthecarfrom
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission making it easier to
move the shift lever out of Park
when you want to drive away.
If the car is facing uphill, turn the
front wheels away from the curb. If
you have a manual transmission, put
it in first gear.
If the car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels toward the curb. If you
have a manual transmission, put it in
reverse gear.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Lockthedoorswiththekeyorthe
remote transmitter.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Turn off the lights.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
On cars with security system
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
253
Main Menu
Table of Content
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Your Honda is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators. All models except for the
4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakes
as standard equipment.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. The
indicators make a very audible
‘‘screeching.’’
Brake Wear Indicators
The Braking System
Driving
254
Main Menu
Table of Content
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal; it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the car (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Your car has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straightaheadeventhoughyouturn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to car loading.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the
brake pedal;
Brake System Design
The Braking System
Driving
255
Front
Main Menu
Table of Content
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your car to veer into
oncoming traffic or off the road.
it
only helps with steering control
during braking. You should always
maintain a safe following distance
from other vehicles.
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your car as soon as possible.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
64
Important Safety Reminders ABS Indicator
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the car;
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
The Braking System
Driving
256
ABS INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your car
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
The TCS indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
383
On all V6 models
The Braking System
Driving
257
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces.
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS Activation
indicator flashes when this occurs.
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your car’s whole braking
system and cannot prevent skidding
if you enter a corner too fast. It is
still your responsibility to drive at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When starting out or driving on a
loose or slippery road surface, you
may notice that the car does not
respond to the accelerator in the
samewayitdoesatothertimes.This
is a sign TCS is activating. You will
seetheTCSActivationindicator
light flash.
TheTCSindicator(seepage )
comesonandstaysonwhenthereis
a problem with the TCS. The TCS
Activation indicator will also come on.
You should still install winter tires on
your car during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with car. Exercise the same
cautioninwinterdrivingasyou
would if your car was not equipped
with TCS.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
64
364
On all V6 models
Traction Control System
Driving
258
TCS INDICATOR
TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off TCS.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the car.
This switch is under the side vent. It
letsyouturntheTractionControl
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS Activation
light is flashing.
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
Activation indicator light comes on
as a reminder. Pressing the switch
again turns the system back on.
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem with TCS, the indicator
will come on and stay on along
with the TCS indicator.
The TCS Activation indicator comes
on or flashes under the following
conditions:
CONTINUED
TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Activation Indicator
Traction Control System
Driving
259
Main Menu
Table of Content
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see on page
).
If the TCS indicator comes on along
with the Brake System indicator, it
indicates a problem in the brake
system (see
on page ).
If the TCS indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by re-
starting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the system inspected
by your Honda dealer. You can still
drive the car without TCS.
256
383
ABS Indicator
Brake System
Indicator
Traction Control System
Driving
260
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
CONTINUED
Rain, fog, and snow conditions
require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your car well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these
conditions.
Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your car longer to
react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
Driving Technique
261
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the wind-
shield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defroster and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
pages , and ).136 144
127
Visibility Traction
Driving
Driving in Bad Weather
262
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your Honda has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your car’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Tongue Load:
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight:
263
Main Menu
Table of Content
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
(LX)
(EX, EX with leather interior)
(LX)
on the front axle
on the rear axle
(EX, EX with leather interior)
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
4-cylinder models:
6-cylinder models:
4-cylinder models:
6-cylinder models:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
264
4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)
4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)
2,195 lbs (995 kg)
1,960 lbs (890 kg)
2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)
1,985 lbs (900 kg)
2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)
2,005 lbs (910 kg)
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
car and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Any hitch used on your car must be
properly bolted to the underbody.
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Checking Loads
Hitches
265
Main Menu
Table of Content
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, and local
regulations. Check with your local
recreational vehicle dealer for the
requirements in your area, and use
only equipment designed for your
vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’ s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your car’s
hydraulic system. No matter how
successful it may seem, any attempt
to attach trailer brakes to your car’s
hydraulic system will lower braking
effectiveness and create a potential
hazard.
Seeyourtrailerdealerformore
information on installing electric
brakes.
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Trailer LightsSafety Chains Trailer Brakes
266
Main Menu
Table of Content
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The car has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
The lights and brakes on your car
and the trailer are working
properly.
Your car tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
263 264
334
Additional Trailer Equipment
Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
Driving
267
Main Menu
Table of Content
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your car’s
handling and performance, so
driving with a trailer requires some
special driving skills and techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your car, and it can
hit or run over something the car
misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for cars with trailers. If
you have an automatic transmission,
use D position when towing a trailer
on level roads. D is the proper shift
lever position to use when towing a
trailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘
’’ in the next column for
additional gear information.)
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently within 3rd, 4th and 5th
gears while going up a hill, shift to
D.
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
3
3
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving
on Hills
Towing a Trailer
Driving
268
Main Menu
Table of Content
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large car, keep a constant speed and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
bottom
Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Backing Up
Parking
Towing a Trailer
Driving
269
Main Menu
Table of Content
270
Main Menu
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
This section explains the importance
of keeping your car well maintained
andwhyyoushouldfollowbasic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 272
.Important Safety Precautions . 273
.................Maintenance Schedule . 274
Maintenance Schedule
..................(4-cylinder Models) . 276
...Required Maintenance Record . 281
Maintenance Schedule
..................(6-cylinder Models) . 284
...Required Maintenance Record . 289
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 291
..............................Fluid Locations . 292
......................................Engine Oil . 294
..................................Adding Oil . 294
....................Recommended Oil . 294
..............................Synthetic Oil . 295
....................................Additives . 296
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 296
.............................Cooling System . 299
............Adding Engine Coolant . 299
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 301
....................Windshield Washers . 306
.......................Transmission Fluid . 307
..........Automatic Transmission . 307
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 310
6-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 311
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 313
............................Brake System . 313
...........................Clutch System . 314
..............................Power Steering . 315
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 316
....................................Hood Latch . 318
Spark Plugs
..................(4-cylinder Models) . 318
Spark Plugs
..................(6-cylinder Models) . 321
...........................................Battery . 324
.................................Wiper Blades . 327
..............Air Conditioning System . 329
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 330
.......................................Drive Belt . 332
....................................Timing Belt . 332
...............................................Tires . 333
......................................Inflation . 333
..................................Inspection . 335
..............................Maintenance . 335
.............................Tire Rotation . 336
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 336
......................Wheels and Tires . 337
..........................Winter Driving . 338
.............................Snow Tires . 338
............................Tire Chains . 338
.............................................Lights . 340
.....................Headlight Aiming . 342
........................Replacing Bulbs . 342
...........................Storing Your Car . 354
413
Maintenance
Maintenance
271
Main Menu
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Regularly maintaining your car is the
best way to protect your investment.
Proper maintenance is essential to
your safety and the safety of your
passengers. It will also reward you
with more economical, trouble-free
driving, and help reduce air pollution.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
272
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this car
or failing to correct a problem
before driving can cause a
crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your car is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
273
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your car
serviced and what things need
attention. It is essential that you have
your car serviced as scheduled to
retain its high level of safety,
dependability, and emissions control
performance.
Avoidexceedingyourcar’sload
limit.Thisputsexcessstresson
the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your car. The load
limit is shown on the label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your car on reasonable
roads within the legal speed limit.
Drive your car regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
car as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Service your car according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your car
MAINLY under one or more of the
following conditions.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less than 10
miles (16 km) per trip.
Extensive idling or long periods of
stop-and-go driving, such as a taxi
or a commercial delivery vehicle.
Driving in extremely hot [over
90°F (32°C)] conditions.
224
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
U.S. Owners
274
Main Menu
Table of Content
＃−
U.S. Cars:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your car best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
Trailer towing, driving with a roof
rack, or driving in mountainous
conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or
deiced roads.
Follow the
Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions.
NOTE: If you only
drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
should follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Normal Conditions.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
OCCASIONALLY
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Canadian Owners
275
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
＃
＊
＃
＃
＊
Maintenance
4-cylinder Models
276
Visually inspect the following items:
Service at the indicated distance
or time whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Inspect every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year
Inspect every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Rotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Inspect drive belt
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
10
16
20
32
30
48
40
64
50
80
60
96
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
M/T
A/T
:
:
12 24 36 48 60 72
275
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
♯
Maintenance
4-cylinder Models
277
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
A, B, C, D
A
B
C
D
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.
10,000 mi/16,000 km
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
30,000 mi/48,000 km
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
50,000 mi/80,000 km
3yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
70,000 mi/112,000 km
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
110,000 mi/176,000 km
6yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, C.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, C.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, D.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then
replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant, then
replace every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
Do items in A, B.
Inspect idle speed.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Inspect drive belt.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).
Replace spark plugs (independent of time).
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
NOTE:
:
274
275
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
＃
＊
＊
＃
＃
Maintenance
4-cylinder Models
278
Visually inspect the following items:
Service at the indicated distance
or time whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Every 110,000 miles (176,000 km)
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Inspect every 160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 8 years
Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year
Inspect every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Lubricate every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year
Rotate tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 1 year
At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Inspect drive belt
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, vehicle underbody
20
32
30
48
10
16
40
64
50
80
60
96
70
112
80
128
90
144
100
160
110
176
120
192
M/T
A/T
:
:
12 24 36 60 7248
275
330
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
＊
＃
CONTINUED
Maintenance
4-cylinder Models
279
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
A, B, C, D, E, F
A
B
C
D
E
F
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time.
5,000 mi/8,000 km
10,000 mi/16,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km
20,000 mi/32,000 km/1 yr
25,000 mi/40,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km
35,000 mi/56,000 km
40,000 mi/64,000 km/2 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km
50,000 mi/80,000 km
3yrs
55,000 mi/88,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
65,000 mi/104,000 km
70,000 mi/112,000 km
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A, C.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do items in A, C.
Do items in A, B.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do item in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T, A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Replace engine oil.
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect drive shaft boots.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect drive belt.
Replace dust and pollen filter .
Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).
Replace spark plugs (independent of time).
274
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
:
:
NOTE:
330
275
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
Maintenance
4-cylinder Models
280
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
75,000 mi/120,000 km
80,000 mi/128,000 km/4 yrs
85,000 mi/136,000 km
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
95,000 mi/152,000 km
100,000 mi/160,000 km/5 yrs
105,000 mi/168,000 km
110,000 mi/176,000 km
6yrs
115,000 mi/184,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
160,000 mi/256,000 km/8 yrs
Do items in A, C.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do item in A.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,E.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Do items in A, C.
DoitemsinA,B,F.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do item in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then replace
every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D,E.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
DoitemsinA,B,D.
Inspect idle speed.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)
281
30,000 mi
35,000 mi
40,000 mi
45,000 mi
50,000 mi
5,000 mi
10,000 mi
15,000 mi
20,000 mi
25,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.
48,000 km
56,000 km
64,000 km
(or 2 years)
72,000 km
80,000 km
8,000 km
16,000 km
24,000 km
32,000 km
(or 1 year)
40,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
278
276
Main Menu
Table of Content
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)
282
80,000 mi
85,000 mi
90,000 mi
95,000 mi
100,000 mi
55,000 mi
60,000 mi
65,000 mi
70,000 mi
75,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp
128,000 km
(or 4 years)
136,000 km
144,000 km
152,000 km
160,000 km
(or 5 years)
88,000 km
96,000 km
(or 3 years)
104,000 km
112,000 km
120,000 km
Date
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Main Menu
Table of Content
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record for 4-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)
283
105,000 mi
110,000 mi
115,000 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp
168,000 km
176,000 km
184,000 km
192,000 km
(or 6 years)
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
Date
Date
Date
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
＃
＃
＃
6-cylinder Models
Maintenance
284
Visually inspect the following items:
Service at the indicated distance
or time whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect drive belt
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
15
24
12
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
105
168
84
At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years
120
192
96
: 275
M/T
A/T
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
♯
Maintenance
6-cylinder Models
285
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
A, B, C
A
B
C
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Inspect drive belt.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.
Inspect valve clearance (independent of
time).
Replace spark plugs (independent of time).
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then
replace every 90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
:
275
NOTE:
274
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
＃
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃＊
＊
6-cylinder Models
Maintenance
286
Visually inspect the following items:
Service at the indicated distance
or time whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Inspect every 105,000 miles (168,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls
vehicle underbody
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Use normal schedule except in dusty
conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect drive belt
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition at
least once per month)
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
At 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 4 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
30
48
24
15
24
12
45
72
36
75
120
60
105
168
84
90
144
72
Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years
60
96
48
120
192
96
At
:
1:
2:
275
332
330
M/T
A/T
1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃＊
＃
＃
＊
＃
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
6-cylinder Models
287
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
A, B, C, D
A
B
C
D
E
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.
3,750 mi/6,000 km
7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos
11,250 mi/18,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km
22,500 mi/36,000 km
26,250 mi/42,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km
37,500 mi/60,000 km
41,250 mi/66,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km
52,500 mi/84,000 km
56,250 mi/90,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace timing belt.
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Replace engine oil and filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 336 ).
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Inspect drive belt.
Replace air cleaner element (independent of time).
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Replace air cleaner element every 15,000 mi/24,000 km
(independent of time), otherwise use normal
conditions schedule.
274
1
2
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving
conditions.
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
NOTE:
:
1:
2:
332
330
275
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃＊
＃＊
＊
＊
♯
Maintenance
6-cylinder Models
288
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement
information under special driving conditions.
NOTE:
1:
2:
:
275
332
330
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace transmission fluid (A/T).
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
Inspect valve clearance (independent of time).
Replace spark plugs (independent of time).
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace transmission fluid (M/T).
Replace timing belt .
Replace transmission fluid (A/T), then replace
every 30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
67,500 mi/108,000 km
71,250 mi/114,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km
82,500 mi/132,000 km
86,250 mi/138,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km
97,500 mi/156,000 km
101,250 mi/162,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km
112,500 mi/180,000 km
116,250 mi/186,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
1
1
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)
289
3,750 mi
7,500 mi
11,250 mi
15,000 mi
18,750 mi
22,500 mi
26,250 mi
30,000 mi
33,750 mi
37,500 mi
41,250 mi
45,000 mi
48,750 mi
52,500 mi
56,250 mi
60,000 mi
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
6,000 km
12,000 km
18,000 km
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
30,000 km
36,000 km
42,000 km
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
54,000 km
60,000 km
66,000 km
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
78,000 km
84,000 km
90,000 km
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.286
284
Main Menu
Table of Content
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record for 6-cylinder Models (Normal and Severe Schedules)
290
63,750 mi
67,500 mi
71,250 mi
75,000 mi
78,750 mi
82,500 mi
86,250 mi
90,000 mi
93,750 mi
97,500 mi
101,250 mi
105,000 mi
108,750 mi
112,500 mi
116,250 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
102,000 km
108,000 km
114,000 km
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
126,000 km
132,000 km
138,000 km
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
150,000 km
156,000 km
162,000 km
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
174,000 km
180,000 km
186,000 km
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See pages
and .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page .
228
230
306
307 308
313
333
340
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
291
Main Menu
Table of Content
4-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
292
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
CLUTCH FLUID
(5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
Main Menu
Table of Content
6-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
293
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(Gray cap)
(6-speed Manual
Transmission only)
Main Menu
Table of Content
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Pour the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection.
Adding Oil Recommended Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
294
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Main Menu
Table of Content
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’ You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your car according
to this chart.
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
295
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
Main Menu
Table of Content
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
1.Changing the Oil and FilterAdditives
Engine Oil
Maintenance
296
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
4.3.2.
CONTINUED
Engine Oil
Maintenance
297
4-cylinder models
OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLTWASHER
OIL FILTER
4-cylinder models6-cylinder models
WASHER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
(4-cylinder models)
(6-cylinder models)
9.
8.
7.
6.
(4-cylinder models)
(6-cylinder models)
5.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
298
OIL FILTER
6-cylinder models
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing. If it is not available, you may
use another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
299
6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled coolant
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
4.
5.
6.1.
2.
3.
Cooling System
Maintenance
300
RESERVE TANK
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder modelsRADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP
Main Menu
Table of Content
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine compo-
nents.
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the temperature control dial all the
way clockwise. Turn off the
ignition and remove the key.
1.
CONTINUED
On cars with Manual A/C
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
301
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Content
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard. Drain the coolant
into an appropriate container.
Turn the ignition ON (II).Make
sure the DUAL indicator is off.
Turn the driver’s side temperature
control dial to 90°F (32°C). Turn
off the ignition and remove the
key.
Remove the radiator cap.
3.
2.
On car with Climate Control System
Cooling System
Maintenance
302
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models6-cylinder models
DRAIN PLUG DRAIN PLUG
Main Menu
Table of Content
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container.
Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt at the rear of the engine
cylinder block. Loosen the drain
bolt.
Remove the reserve tank
mounting bolt with a wrench.
Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container, then put the
tank back in its holder. Install the
mounting bolt securely.
5.4. 6.
CONTINUED
6-cylinder models only
Cooling System
Maintenance
303
HOLDERS
RESERVE
TANK CAP
MOUNTING
BOLT
RESERVE
TANK
HOLDERS6-cylinder models
RESERVE
TANK CAP
4-cylinder models
MOUNTING
BOLT
DRAIN BOLT
RUBBER HOSE
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Content
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
7.
9.
8.
6-cylinder models only
Cooling System
Maintenance
304
4-cylinder models
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
6-cylinder models
7 lbf·ft (9.8 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Content
The cooling system capacity is: Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine.
Fill the radiator with coolant up to
the base of the filler neck.
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Pour
coolant into the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck and into the
reserve tank up to the MAX mark.
Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the cooling fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
16.
17.
18.
15.
14.
13.
12.
10.
11.
With automatic transmission:
With 5-speed manual transmission:
With 6-speed manual transmission:
With automatic transmission:
Cooling System
Maintenance
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
305
1.37 US gal (5.2 )
1.40 US gal (5.3
)
1.77 US gal (6.7
)
1.74 US gal (6.6
)
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the right headlight.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
67
On Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
306
LEVEL GAUGE
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,
while a vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine.
Make sure the notch in the rubber
cap fits in the dipstick guide and
that you push the dipstick in all
the way.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
tube to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled fluid
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
1.
2.
3.
5.
4.
4-cylinder models
CONTINUED
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
307
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
GUIDE
Main Menu
Table of Content
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch fits in the
dipstick guide and the dipstick is
down all the way.
Make sure the rubber cap on the
dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
all the way.
1.
2.
6.
3.
6-cylinder models
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
308
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Main Menu
Table of Content
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the rubber cap fits in
the dipstick guide and the dipstick
is down all the way.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled fluid
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
5.
6.
4.
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
309
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the car sitting on
level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual Transmis-
sion Fluid (MTF) until it starts to
run out of the hole. Reinstall the
filler bolt and tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
On 4-cylinder models
5-speed Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
310
FILLER BOLT
Correct level
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
Remove the check bolt and look for
transmission fluid coming out of the
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
If no fluid comes out, remove the
filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the check bolt
hole. Let the fluid run out until it
stops, then reinstall the check bolt
and the filler bolt.
On EX-V6 model
6-speed Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
311
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
CHECK BOLT FILLER BOLT
WASHER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Pour the fluid to the filler hole slowly
and carefully so you do not spill.
Clean up any spills immediately.
Spilled fluid could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your Honda dealer.
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
312
Main Menu
Table of Content
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Check the fluid level in the reser-
voirs monthly. There are up to two
reservoirs, depending on the model.
They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled fluid could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your car’s braking
system and can cause extensive
damage.
Brake System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
313
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Content
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
Maintenance
Clutch System
Brake and Clutch Fluid
314
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled fluid could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Maintenance
Power Steering
315
6-cylider models
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL4-cylider models LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Content
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
To replace it:
Loosen the four bolts, and remove
the air cleaner housing cover.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and tighten the four bolts.
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
1.
3.
4.
5.
2.
Maintenance
Replacement
Air Cleaner Element
4-cylinder Models
316
BOLTS
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Content
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and tighten the four bolts.
To replace it:
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
Loosen the four bolts, and remove
the air cleaner housing cover.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
1.
3.
4.
5.2.
Maintenance
Air Cleaner Element
Replacement
6-cylinder Models
317
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
BOLTS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Remove the four nuts with a
wrench, then remove the coil
cover.
The spark plugs in your car are a
special iridium-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
1.
Replacement
Spark PlugsHood Latch
(4-cylinder Models)
Hood Latch, Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)
Maintenance
318
PIVOTS
NUTS
COIL COVER
LATCH ASSEMBLY
NUTS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Use a wrench to remove the bolt
holding the ignition coil. Pull the
ignition coil up slightly.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Remove the ignition coil.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
5.2.
4.
3.
6.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)
Maintenance
319
CONNECTOR
IGNITION COIL
LOCK TAB
BOLT
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Content
Install the ignition coil into the
hole.
Connect the wire connector to the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Push the ignition coil down all the
way. Install the bolt.
Repeat this procedure for the
other three spark plugs.
Reinstall the coil cover, and
tighten the four nuts.
9.
NGK:
DENSO:
12.
13.
11.
10.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs (4-cylinder Models)
Specifications:
320
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Cleanoffanydirtandoilthathas
collected around the ignition coil.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
The spark plugs in your car are a
special iridium-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the distance
recommendation in the maintenance
schedule.
1. 2.
3.
Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)
Maintenance
Replacement
321
CONNECTOR
HOLDING CLIP IGNITION COIL
Main Menu
Table of Content
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
Use a wrench to remove the
hexagonsocketheadcapbolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
6. 7.4.
5.
Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)
Maintenance
322
HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Content
Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
NGK:
DENSO:
8.
9.
10.
11.
Specifications:
Spark Plugs (6-cylinder Models)
Maintenance
323
IZFR6K-11
SKJ20DR-M11
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
Check the condition of your car’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
Battery
Maintenance
324
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s
electrical system.
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
CONTINUED
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
Battery
Maintenance
325
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Main Menu
Table of Content
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the AUTO feature of
the driver’s window will be disabled.
You should reset the AUTO feature
(see page ).105
Battery
Maintenance
326
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
car’s electronic controls. Detach the
battery cables bef ore connecting the
battery to a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
To replace the blade:
Raise the driver’s side first, then
the passenger’s side.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
327
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the passenger’s side first,
then the driver’s side.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
328
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Content
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed
system. Any major maintenance,
such as recharging, should be done
by a qualified mechanic. You can do
a couple of things to make sure the
air conditioning works efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on
pages and .)396 398
Air Conditioning System
Maintenance
329
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
Main Menu
Table of Content
The dust and pollen filter is located
behind the glove box.
Open the glove box.
To replace it:
Push the stop on the right side of
the glove box to detach it from the
glove box.
Pivot the glove box out of the way.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual.
1.
3.
2.
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
Replacement
330
STOP
Main Menu
Table of Content
Pushinthetabsonthecornersof
the dust and pollen filter case. Pull
out the case.
Remove the filter from the case.
Install the new filter in the case.
Make sure the arrows of the ‘‘AIR
FLOW’’ marks on the filter point
to the air flow direction
(downward).
Install the case. Make sure both
tabs ‘‘click’’ into place.
Install the glove box stop, and
close the glove box.
If you are not sure how to replace
the dust and pollen filter, have it
replaced by your Honda dealer.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4.
Dust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
331
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
An auto-tensioner adjusts the tension
of the drive belt. The pointer on the
auto-tensioner should be in the
proper range. It should be checked
accordingtothetimeanddistance
recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
Check the condition of the drive belt.
Examine the edges of the belt for
cracks or fraying.
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Replace these belts at 60,000 miles
(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your car in one or
more of these conditions:
If the pointer is out of this range or
you see signs of wear, have the drive
belt replaced by your Honda dealer
as soon as possible.
6-cylinder models only
Timing BeltDrive Belt
Maintenance
Drive Belt, Timing Belt
332
POINTER
Proper range
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
POINTER
Proper
range
Main Menu
Table of Content
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the car
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the car
before checking the tire pressure,
the tires can still be considered
‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your car
ride more harshly, are more prone to
damage from road hazards, and wear
unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your car, your tires
must be the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread,
and correctly inflated. The following
pages give more detailed information
on how and when to check air
pressure, how to inspect your tires
for damage and wear, and what to do
when your tires need to be replaced.
Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .334
CONTINUED
Inflation
Tires
Maintenance
333
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot [the car has been driven
several miles (kilometers)], you will
see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa,
0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the
cold reading. This is normal. Do not
let air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold air pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional technical information
about your tires, see page .
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
400
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
EX-V6 with M/T
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T1
2
All models
4-cylinder LX model
All models except 4-cylinder LX
Tires
Maintenance
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
334
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm
)
P205/65R15 92H
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm
)
1
2
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Content
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
Your car’s tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
CONTINUED
Inspection Maintenance
Tires
Maintenance
335
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your car’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
The tires that came with your car
were selected to match the perform-
ance capabilities of the car while
providing the best combination of
handling, ride comfort, and long life.
Youshouldreplacethemwithradial
tires of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
10,000 miles (16,000 km) on
4-cylinder models and 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) on 6-cylinder models.
Move the tires to the positions
showninthecharteachtimethey
are rotated.
On EX and EX-V6 models
Tire Rotation
Replacing Tires and Wheels
Tires
Maintenance
336
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
Improper wheel weights can damage
your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only
Honda wheel weights f or balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Content
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your car’s handling.
Tires:TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the car. Tire size and
construction can affect wheel speed
and may cause the system to work
inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your car. Replacement
wheels are available at your Honda
dealer.
Wheels:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
400
LX model
LX model
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models
EX-V6 with M/T model
EX-V6 with M/T model
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with A/T models
Tires
Maintenance
Wheels and Tires
337
15x61/2JJ
16x61/2JJ
17x7JJ
P205/65R15 92H
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
Installing improper tires on your
car can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Content
＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your car’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your car’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
are clear. Check with the tire dealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Mount snow chains on your tires
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your car has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Winter Driving
Snow Tires Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
338
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Removethechainsassoonasyou
begin driving on cleared roads.
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
The chains listed here are available
at many auto supply stores. For a
complete list of stores, visit the SCC
website at www.scc-chain.com.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed.
Thesechainsaretheonlyonesthat
have been approved by Honda for
use on your car. Since Honda cannot
test all chains, you must be
personally responsible for proper
selection, installation, and use of
snow chains.
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
CH2412T
LX
EX, LX-V6 and EX-V6 with automatic
transmission
EX-V6 with manual transmission
Tires
Maintenance
339
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the operation of your car’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
340
LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT
TURN SIGNAL/PARKING/SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check the following:
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate lights
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on pages and
to determine what type of
replacement bulb is needed.
397
399
Lights
Maintenance
341
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHTSTOP/TAILLIGHT/
SIDE MARKER LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Content
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your car was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustment of the
headlights should be performed by a
Honda technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Your car has two bulbs on each side,
four in total. Make sure you are
replacing the bulb that is burned out.
Your car uses halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Open the hood. If you need to
change a bulb on the passenger’s
side, undo the two fasteners and
remove the air intake cover.
1.
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
High Beam Headlight
342
4-cylinder models
FASTENERS AIR INTAKE
COVER
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
3.
2.
4.
5.
Lights
Maintenance
343
6-cylinder models
AIR INTAKE
COVER
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
TAB BULB
TAB
BULB
Main Menu
Table of Content
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
If you are changing the bulb on
the passenger’s side, start the
engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the driver’s side, turn the
steering wheel to the right.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
(Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and
secure them by pushing on the
heads until they lock.
3.
1.
2.6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
Low Beam Headlight
344
HOLDING CLIPS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Reinstall the air intake duct
securely.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
If you need to change the low
beam headlight bulb on the driver’s
side, remove the air intake duct.
You can reach the air intake duct
fromthebacksideoftheinner
fender.
6.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
4.
On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
Maintenance
Lights
345
AIR INTAKE DUCT
EX-V6 with M/T
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you are changing the bulb on
the passenger’s side, start the
engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the driver’s side, turn the
steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
1.
3.2.
4.
Maintenance
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
Parking/Side Marker Light Bulb
346
HOLDING CLIPS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Remove the burned out bulb from
thesocketbypushingitinand
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the holding clips. Lock each
oneinplacebypushingonthe
center.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Maintenance
347
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the trunk.
Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.
Determine which of the three
bulbs is burned out: stop/taillight/
side marker, back-up or turn
signal.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the light assembly cover.
Make sure it snaps into place.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
348
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the trunk.
Carefully bend back the corner of
the trunk lid trim to expose the
bulbs.
Remove the six trim clips from the
trunk lid trim by carefully prying
them using a small, flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by squeezing the tabs on
both sides of the socket.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Reinstall the socket back in place
by pushing it in until it latches.
Reinstall the trunk lid trim. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk lid seal.
Put each trim clip in the hole on
the trunk lid trim and push on the
center until it locks (the center is
flushwiththehead).1.
2.
7.
8.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
349
TRIM CLIPS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Reinstall the socket. Turn it clock-
wise until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
350
BULB
SOCKET
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
The ceiling light, spotlight, door light
and vanity mirror light come apart
the same way, but they do not use
thesametypeofbulb.
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
Door light:
Pry on the top left or right of the
lens.
Ceiling light:
Pry on the front edge of the lens
near both sides.
Spotlights:
Pry on the inner edge of both
spotlights.
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Carefully snap the lens back
in place.
1.
2.
3.
On LX and LX-V6 models
On EX and EX-V6 models
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Lights
351
CEILING LIGHT
BULB
SPOTLIGHTS
BULBS
SPOTLIGHTS
BULBS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Lights
Maintenance
352
BULB
BULBS
DOOR COURTESY LIGHT VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Open the trunk.
Put a cloth on the right side edge
of the trunk light assembly.
Remove the trunk light assembly
by using a small flat-tipped
screwdriver to pry carefully on the
right edge of the assembly.
Pull the bulb straight out of the
holder. Push the new bulb straight
into the holder until it bottoms.
Put the light assembly back into
the hole, left side first. Push on
the right side until it snaps into
place.
1.
2.
3.
Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb
Maintenance
Lights
353
TRUNK LIGHT
BULB
Main Menu
Table of Content
Block the rear wheels.
Fill the fuel tank.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
If you need to park your car for an
extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your car back on the road. If
possible, store your car indoors.
If the car is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Coverthecarwitha‘‘breathable’’
cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton.
Nonporous materials, such as
plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a car
body wax to the painted surfaces
that mate with the door and trunk
seals.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
If you store your car for 12 months
or longer, have your Honda dealer
perform the inspections called for in
the 24 months maintenance schedule
(Normal Conditions) as soon as you
take it out of storage (see page ).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the car has actually
reached that time or mileage.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
296
274
Maintenance
Storing Your Car
354
Main Menu
Table of Content
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you
informationonhowtocleanyourcar
and preserve its appearance: the
paint, brightwork, wheels and
interior. Also included are several
things you can do to help prevent
corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 356
.....................................Washing . 356
.......................................Waxing . 357
....................Aluminum Wheels . 357
..........................Paint Touch-up . 357
..................................Interior Care . 358
...................................Carpeting . 358
.................................Floor Mats . 358
.........................................Fabric . 359
...........................................Vinyl . 359
.......................................Leather . 359
...................................Seat Belts . 359
....................................Windows . 360
..........................Air Fresheners . 360
....................Corrosion Protection . 361
.................................Body Repairs . 362
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
355
Main Menu
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Frequent washing helps preserve
your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can
scratch the paint, while tree sap and
bird droppings can permanently ruin
the finish.
Wash your car in a shady area, not in
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in
the sun, move it into the shade and
let the exterior cool down before you
start.
Rinse the car thoroughly with cool
water to remove loose dirt.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Wash the car using the water and
detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the car does not need waxing.
357
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
356
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your car.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
Always wash and dry the whole car
before waxing it. You should wax
your car, including the metal trim,
whenever water sits on the surface
in large patches. It should form into
beads or droplets after waxing.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the car does not
need waxing.
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners or stiff
brushes, can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your car frequently for chips
or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
EX and EX-V6 models
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Waxing
Aluminum Wheels
Paint Touch-up
357
Main Menu
Table of Content
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If you replace it, use a Honda floor
matthatisdesignedtobeusedwith
the floor mat anchors in your car.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
The Honda driver’s floor mat that
came with your car was designed to
be hooked over the floor mat
anchors. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
putitbackinyourcar.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Interior Care
Appearance Care
358
Main Menu
Table of Content
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethecar.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
CONTINUED
On EX with leather interior and EX-V6
models
Fabric
Vinyl
Leather Seat Belts
Interior Care
Appearance Care
359
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Content
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your car,
it is best to use a solid type. Some
liquid air fresheners contain chemi-
cals that may cause parts of the
interior trim and fabric to crack or
discolor.
Ifyouusealiquidairfreshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Interior Care
Appearance Care
Windows Air Fresheners
360
The rear window def ogger and
antenna wires are bonded to the inside
of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-and-
down can dislodge and break these
wires. When cleaning the rear window,
use gentle pressure and wipe side-to-
side.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your car:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
car stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the car.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your car from corroding
by performing some simple periodic
maintenance:
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
car inspected and repaired
periodically.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your car. This is
especially important in areas that
useroadsaltinwinter.Itisalsoa
good idea in humid climates and
areas subject to salt air. Be careful
not to damage the ABS wheel
sensors and wiring at each wheel.
1.
2.
Appearance Care
Corrosion Protection
361
Main Menu
Table of Content
Body repairs can affect your car’s
resistance to corrosion. If your car
needs repairs after a collision, pay
close attention to the parts used in
the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
Honda replacement body parts.
Some companies make sheet metal
pieces that seem to duplicate the
original Honda body parts, but are
actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want Honda parts used in the repair.
Although most insurers recognize
the quality of original parts, some
maytrytospecifythattherepairsbe
done with other available parts. You
should investigate this before any
repairs have begun.
Takeyourcartoyourauthorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
362
Main Menu
Table of Content
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their cars. It gives
you information about how to safely
evaluate the problem and what to do
to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your car towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 364
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 365
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 371
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
........................Very Slowly . 371
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 372
................................Jump Starting . 373
............If Your Engine Overheats . 376
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 379
..........Charging System Indicator . 380
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 381
.......................Readiness Codes . 382
...............Brake System Indicator . 383
..................Closing the Moonroof . 384
..............................................Fuses . 386
..........Checking and Replacing . 386
......................Emergency Towing . 391
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
363
Main Menu
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Your car has a compact spare tire
that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your car as soon as you can.
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page ). Driving
withthecompactsparetiremay
activate the TCS.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your car. Do not use your spare
tire on another car unless it is the
same make and model.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
259
On all V6 models
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
364
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor by lifting up on the back edge.
Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Park the car on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park (automatic) or Reverse
(manual). Apply the parking brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the car while
you change the tire.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
365
TRUNK FLOOR
SPARE TIRE JACK
TOOL KIT
The car can easily roll off the
jack, seriously injuring anyone
underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the car when it
is supported only by the jack.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
The jack is behind a cover in the
right fender. Remove the cover by
turning the handle counterclock-
wise, then pulling on the cover.
6.
7.
8.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
366
JACK WHEEL WRENCH
WHEEL NUT
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the car
until the flat tire is off the ground.
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Place
the jack under the jacking point.
Turn the end bracket clockwise
until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point. Make sure the
jacking point tab is resting in the
jack notch.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
9. 10.
11.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
367
JACKING POINT
WHEEL WRENCH
EXTENSION
Main Menu
Table of Content
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
12. 13.
On LX and LX-V6 models
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
368
WHEEL COVER
WHEEL NUTS
HUB
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Lower the car to the ground and
remove the jack.
15. 16.14.
EX and EX-V6 models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
369
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Content
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
17.
19.
18.
22.
20. 21.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Changing a Flat Tire
370
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
For
spare
tire
For
normal
tire
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is proba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connec-
tions (see page ). You can
then try jump starting the car from
a booster battery (see page ).
373
391
373
324
CONTINUED
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
371
Main Menu
Table of Content
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Your car has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
386
391
83
241
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
372
Main Menu
Table of Content
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
To jump start your car, follow these
directions closely:
If your car’s battery has run down,
you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
You cannot start a Honda with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
1.
2.
324
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
373
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−＋
＋
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
3. 4.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
374
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models
Main Menu
Table of Content
Once your car is running, discon-
nectthenegativecablefromyour
car, then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your car, then the booster battery.
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
Start your car. If the starter motor
still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-to-
metal contact.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle. Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until all
are disconnected. Otherwise, you
may cause an electrical short.
7.
6.
5.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
375
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
6-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
The pointer of your car’s tempera-
ture gauge should stay in the mid-
range under most conditions. It may
go higher if you are driving up a long
steep hill on a very hot day. If it
climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Your car can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling/
climate control system and all
otheraccessories.Turnonthe
hazard warning indicators.
1.
2.
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
376
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point, then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
230
391
CONTINUED
If Your Engine Overheats
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
377
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
9. 11.
12.
10.
391
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If Your Engine Overheats
Emergency
Towing
378
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Letthecarsitforaminute.Open
the hood and check the oil level
(see page ). Although oil level
and oil pressure are not directly
connected, an engine that is very
low on oil can lose pressure during
cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
1.
2.
3.
4.
228
294
391
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Emergency
Towing
379
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the car stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Content
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories:radio,heater,A/C,
climate control, rear defogger, cruise
control, etc. Try not to use other
electrically-operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running and take extra care not to
stall it. Starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Charging System Indicator
380
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Content
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your car’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your car to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
car, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes one driving trip.
If the indicator remains on past one
driving trip, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the car
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your car if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
381
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your car’s emissions controls
and engine. Those repairs may not be
covered by your car’s warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Your car has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your car’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your car for a
state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. Refer to
State Emissions Testing for more
information. (See page .)
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If
it then goes off, the readiness codes
are set. If it blinks 5 times, the
readiness codes are not set.
408
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Readiness Codes
382
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the car’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the car to your
dealer and have the brake system
inspected for leaks or worn brake
pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the car
begins to slow down, and you will
have to press harder on the pedal.
The distance needed to stop will be
much longer.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If you must drive the car a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
If the ABS indicator comes on with
this indicator, have the car inspected
by your Honda dealer immediately.
313
391
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
383
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Content
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually. To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceilling as
shown in the illustration.
Insert the moonroof wrench
securely into the socket behind
this plug. Hold the longer handle
as shown and turn the wrench
slowly until the moonroof is fully
closed.
5.
4.
3.
1.
2.
390
On EX and EX-V6 models
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
384
SOCKET
ROUND PLUG
TAB
NOTCH
Main Menu
Table of Content
Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
If you need to close the moonroof
manually, it means your car’s
moonroof opening/closing function
is developing a problem. Have your
car checked by a Honda dealer.
6.
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
385
Main Menu
Table of Content
All the electrical circuits in your car
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
The under-hood fuse box is located
near the back of the engine compart-
ment on the driver’s side. To open it,
pushthetabsasshown.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
If something electrical in your car
stops working, the first thing you
should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
upward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
1.
2.
390389
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Checking and Replacing Fuses
386
INTERIOR
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
NOTCH
Main Menu
Table of Content
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
3. 4.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
387
BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
Main Menu
Table of Content
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the car without
fixing the problem, and you do not
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the
same rating or a lower rating from
one of the other circuits. Make sure
youcandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your car.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified mechanic.
5.
6.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
388
BLOWN
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＋
＊
Amps.Amps. No.No.
Amps.No.
CONTINUED
Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
Circuits Protected
: 6-cylinder models
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
(30A)
10 A
15 A
10 A
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
(40 A)
40 A
100 A
50 A
50 A
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
20
21
22
23
Left Headlight Low Beam
(Rear Defroster Coil)
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light
Right Headlight High Beam
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU
Condenser fan
Not Used
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
MG. Clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
ABS Motor
TCS Motor
ABS F/S
TCS
Option
Option
Heater Motor
Battery
Not Used
BIG1Main
Power Window Main
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
389
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
＊
−
−
−
−
＊
No.
No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
: On Canadian models
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10 A
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
30 A
(15 A)
15 A
(10 A)
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
Back-Up Lights
Door Lock
Front Accessory Sockets
IG OPDS
IG Wiper
Not Used
DBW
Ignition Coil
Daytime Running Light
Laf Heater
Radio
Interior Light
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
(20 A)
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Not Used
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Heated Seats
Not Used
IG ACG
IG Fuel Pump
IG Washer
IG Meter
IG SRS
IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Moonroof
Not Used
IG HAC
Not Used
ACC
HAC OP
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
390
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your car on the back of a truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the car off
the ground. Your car’s suspension
and body can be seriously damaged.
If your Honda cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If due to
damage, your car must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to Neutral.
If your car needs to be towed, call a
professional towing service or, if you
belong to one, an organization that
provides roadside assistance. Never
tow your car behind another vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the car no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
If your car is equipped with a front
spoiler, remove it before towing so it
is not damaged.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
CONTINUED
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
Sling-type Equipment
This is the best way to transport
your Honda.
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Honda.
This method of towing is
unacceptable.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
391
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
car must be transported with the f ront
wheels of f the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you decide to tow your car with all
four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for
towing as described above, and leave
the ignition switch in Accessory (I)
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
rundownthebattery.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
392
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Trying to lif t or tow your car by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the car’s weight.
Main Menu
Table of Content
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your car’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 394
Specifications
..................(4-cylinder Models) . 396
Specifications
..................(6-cylinder Models) . 398
DOT Tire Quality Grading
............................(U.S.Cars) .400
.................................Treadwear . 400
......................................Traction . 400
.............................Temperature . 401
...........................Tire Information . 402
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 403
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 404
.......................Emissions Controls . 405
.....................The Clean Air Act . 405
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 405
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 405
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 405
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 406
....................PGM-FI System . 406
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 406
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 406
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 406
....................Replacement Parts . 406
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 407
..............State Emissions Testing . 408
Technical Information
Technical Information
393
Main Menu
Your car has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
car for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your car. The easiest place to find
the VIN is on a plate fastened to the
top of the dashboard. You can see it
by looking through the windshield
on the driver’s side. It is also on the
Certification label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on
the engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also provided in bar code
on the Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
394
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Content
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
395
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
6-cylinder Models
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
4-cylinder Models
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
396
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
187.6 in (4,766 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.7 in (1,415 mm)
105.1 in (2,670 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
1.37 US gal (5.2 )
1.40 US gal (5.3 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
2.2 US qt (2.1
)
3.0 US qt (2.8 )
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual trans-
mission fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
17.09 US gal (64.7
)
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Cars
Canada Cars
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
397
Battery
Fuses
Lights Engine
Alignment
Tires
12 V
12 V
24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
60 W (HB3)
51 W (HB4)
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
21 W
21/5 W
18 W
3CP
8W
21 W
5W
2CP
1.1 W
8W
Capacity 12 V
12 V
38 AH/5 HR
47 AH/20 HR
Interior
Under-hood
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
High-mount brake light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
See page 390 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 389 or the fuse box
cover.
Water cooled 4-stroke i-VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.7 : 1
See spark plug maintenance sec-
tion page 320 .
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°15’
Size
Pressure
P205/65R15 92H
P205/60R16 91V
T135/90D15 100M
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
1:LX
2:EX
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
Stop/taillight/side marker lights
1
2
1
2
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Content
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
398
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual
transmission
fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
ND-OIL8
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
7.6 US qt (7.2
)
3.1 US qt (2.9
)
5.3 US qt (5.0
)
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
0.16 US gal (0.6
)
1.77 US gal (6.7
)
2.22 US gal (8.4 )
105.1 in (2,670 mm) 1.74 US gal (6.6 )
187.6 in (4,766 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.7 in (1,415 mm)
2.17 US gal (8.2 )
2.3 US qt (2.2
)
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Cars
Canada Cars
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Technical Information
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
399
Engine
Alignment
Lights
Battery
Fuses
Tires
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC
6-cylinder gasoline engine
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
High-mount brake light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
Capacity
Interior
Under-hood
Size
Pressure
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
63 W (HB3)
51 W (HB4)
24/2.2 CP
21 W
21/5 W
18 W
3CP
8W
21 W
5W
2CP
1.1 W
8W
52 AH/5 HR
65 AH/20 HR
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
183 cu-in (2,997 cm )
10.0 : 1
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°15’
P215/50R17 93V
P205/60R16 91V
T135/90D15 100M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
T135/80R16 101MSee page 390 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 389 or the fuse box
cover. 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
See spark plug maintenance sec-
tion page 323 .
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
1:
2:
LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmission
EX-V6 with manual transmission
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
Stop/taillight/side marker lights
1
2
1
2
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature perform-
ance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards.
The following explains these
gradings.
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Technical Information
400
Main Menu
Table of Content
− Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Temperature A,B,C
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Technical Information
401
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your car have
a number of markings. Those you
should be aware of are described
below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
tire size with an explanation of what
each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Rim diameter in inches.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
look like the following example TIN.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
Tire type code.
Date of manufacture.
P
225
55
R
94
V
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
Technical Information
Tire Information
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identification Number
402
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
P225/55R16 94V
Main Menu
Table of Content
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your car was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
MTBE
ETHANOL
METHANOL
Oxygenated Fuels
Technical Information
403
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your car back into
compliance will require the replace-
ment of several components, such as
theoxygensensorsandthethree
way catalytic converter. These re-
placements are not covered under
warranty.
Driving in Foreign Countries
Technical Information
404
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your car’s
engine produces several byproducts.
Some of these are carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline
evaporating from the tank also
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling
the production of NOx, CO, and HC
is important to the environment.
Under certain conditions of sunlight
and climate, NOx and HC react to
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your car has a Positive Crankcase
Ventilation System. This keeps
gasses that build up in the engine’s
crankcase from going into the
atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase
Ventilation valve routes them from
the crankcase back to the intake
manifold. They are then drawn into
the engine and burned.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
274
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
405
Main Menu
Table of Content
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your car. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
genuine Honda replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lowerqualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your car.
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Engine Control Module (ECM)
or the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
2
2
Replacement PartsExhaust Emissions Controls
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
406
Main Menu
Table of Content
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Park your car away from high grass,
dry leaves, or other flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your car diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
407
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
Main Menu
Table of Content
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
If you take your car for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
Make sure the car has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Keep the car in Park (automatic
transmission) or Neutral (manual
transmission). Increase the engine
speed to 2,000 rpm and hold it
there until the temperature gauge
rises to at least 1/4 of the scale
(approximately 3 minutes).
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the car re-tested within the next
two or three days, you can condition
the car for re-testing by doing the
following.
Testing of Readiness Codes
Technical Information
State Emissions Testing
408
Main Menu
Table of Content
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the car coast for several seconds
without using the accelerator
pedal or the brake pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T) or 5th/6th (M/T). Do
notusethecruisecontrol.When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
409
Main Menu
Table of Content
410
Main Menu
Customer Relations
................................Information . 412
....................Warranty Coverages . 413
Reporting Safety Defects
...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 414
.....................Authorized Manuals . 415
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
411
Main Menu
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your car
Date of purchase
Mileage on your car
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
car to you
394
Customer Relations Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
412
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 250-4318
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the car.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
covers
your new car, except for the battery,
emissions control systems, and
accessories, against defects in
materials and workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your car’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthecar.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2003 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty infor-
mation is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2003 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
New Car Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
413
Main Menu
Table of Content
If you believe that your car has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of cars, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Warranty and Customer Relations
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
414
Main Menu
Table of Content
＊
＊
＊
−
＊
２
０
０
３
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your car can
be obtained from Helm Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number on the form. For
manuals prior to the year shown below, contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box
07280, Detroit, Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
415
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$70.00
$40.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$10.00
FREE
Form Description
2003 Honda Accord
Service Manual
2003 Honda Accord V6
Service Manual Supplement
2003 Honda Accord
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003 Honda Accord
Body Repair Manual
2003 Honda Accord 2 Door
Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Accord Navigation
System Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Accord 2 Door
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61SDA00
61SDA01
61SDA00EL
61SDA30
31SDN600
31SDA700
31SDNQ00
HON-R
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Main Menu
Table of Content
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your car.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
416
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Content
CONTINUED
Battery
......Charging System Light . 62, 380
............................Jump Starting . 373
..............................Maintenance . 324
....................Specifications . 397, 399
..............................Before Driving . 223
....................................Belts,Seat .8,46
.........................Beverage Holders . 112
...................................Body Repair . 362
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 256
.............Break-in, New Linings . 224
....................Bulb Replacement . 348
...........................................Fluid . 313
.......................................Parking . 110
.................System Indicator . 63, 383
........................Wear Indicators . 254
.............................Braking System . 254
........................Break-in, New Car . 224
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76
........................Brights, Headlights . 74
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 348
..............................Brake Lights . 348
..............................Ceiling Light . 351
................Door Courtesy Light . 351
................Front Parking Lights . 346
.................................Headlights . 342
.........High-mount Brake Light . 350
.................License Plate Lights . 349
....................Specifications . 397, 399
...................................Spotlights . 351
...............................Trunk Light . 353
....................Turn Signal Lights . 346
................Vanity Mirror Lights . 351
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 342
...Accessories and Modifications . 232
................................Accessories . 232
.Additional Safety Precautions . 233
............................Modifications . 233
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 85
............Accessory Power Sockets . 116
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 296
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 49
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 316
...........Air Conditioning . 122, 131, 138
..............................Maintenance . 329
.........................Usage . 122, 131, 138
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 333
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 403
........................Aluminum Wheels . 357
......................................Antifreeze . 299
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 64, 256
...................................Operation . 255
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 212
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 84
..........................Appearance Care . 355
..........................................Armrest . 111
................Audio System . 148, 163, 187
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 75
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 47
.............Automatic Speed Control . 214
..............Automatic Transmission . 248
..................Capacity, Fluid . 396, 398
.......Checking Fluid Level . 307, 308
.......................................Shifting . 248
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248
................Shift Lever Positions . 248
....................Shift Lock Release . 251
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
...................Capacities Chart . 396, 398
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56
......................................Cargo Net . 237
.............................Carrying Cargo . 234
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..................CD Changer . 156, 173, 196
.......................................CD Player . 154
........................CD Pocket, Center . 113
........................Certification Label . 394
............................................Chains . 338
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 365
............Changing Engine Coolant . 301
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 296
.............................When to . 276, 284
...Charging System Indicator . 62, 380
............Checklist, Before Driving . 240
.......................................Child Seats . 26
.........................................LATCH . 43
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42
...................................Cleaner, Air . 316
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 357
...................................Carpeting . 358
......................................Exterior . 356
.........................................Fabric . 359
.......................................Interior . 358
.......................................Leather . 359
...................................Seat Belts . 359
...........................................Vinyl . 359
......................................Window . 360
...............Climate Control System . 129
.........Clock, Setting the . 153, 171, 193
...................................Clutch Fluid . 314
........................CO in the Exhaust . 406
...................................Coin Pocket . 113
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 242
..............................Compact Spare . 364
.................Console Compartment . 111
...............Consumer Information . 412
.............Controls, Instruments and . 59
Coolant
........................................Adding . 299
....................................Checking . 230
.........................Proper Solution . 299
...................Temperature Gauge . 70
....................Corrosion Protection . 361
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 405
............Cruise Control Operation . 214
..........Customer Relations Office . 412
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 60
................Daytime Running Lights . 76
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 414
................Defogger, Rear Window . 79
Defrosting the
....................Windows . 127, 136, 144
............................Dimensions . 396, 398
...............Dimming the Headlights . 74
Dipstick
.Automatic Transmission . 307, 308
..................................Engine Oil . 228
..........................Directional Signals . 77
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 254
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 298
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 86
......................Power Door Locks . 86
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400
Downshifting, Manual
.....................Transmission . 243, 245
.......................................Drive Belt . 332
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 239
....................................Economy . 231
.........................In Bad Weather . 261
................In Foreign Countries . 404
..Dual Temperature Control . 137, 145
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 330
..............................Economy, Fuel . 231
............Emergencies on the Road . 363
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 373
...........Brake System Indicator . 383
................Changing a Flat Tire . 365
.....Charging System Indicator . 380
..................Checking the Fuses . 386
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 379
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 381
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 384
..................Overheated Engine . 376
.........................Emergency Brake . 110
......................Emergency Flashers . 79
......................Emergency Towing . 391
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 92
.......................Emissions Controls . 405
.............Emissions Testing, State . 408
Engine
.............................................Belt . 332
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 381
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 379
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 294
...............................Overheating . 376
....................Specifications . 397, 399
............Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251
.......................................Starting . 241
..Engine Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 403
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 405
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 356
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 359
..................Fan, Interior . 122, 133, 143
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 121
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 225
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 316
.........................Dust and Pollen . 330
...............................................Oil . 296
5-speed Manual Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 310
5-speed Manual Transmission
................................Shifting the . 243
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 79
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 365
Fluids
.Automatic Transmission . 307, 308
..........................................Brake . 313
.........................................Clutch . 314
......Manual Transmission . 310, 311
..........................Power Steering . 315
..................Windshield Washer . 306
.........................Folding Rear Seat . 100
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 404
..........................Four-way Flashers . 79
..............................Front Airbags . 9, 49
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 342
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 79
........................................Headlights . 74
........................................Aiming . 342
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 75
............Daytime Running Lights . 76
............Low Beams, Turning on . 74
.........................Reminder Chime . 74
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 342
...................................Turning on . 74
..............................Head Restraints . 99
.....................Heating and Cooling . 122
...............................Heated Mirror . 109
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 242
HomeLink Wireless Control
........................................System . 218
....................................Hood Latch . 318
.......................Hood, Opening the . 226
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 314
.................................Hydroplaning . 262
.................................................Fuel . 224
......................Fill Door and Cap . 225
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 224
...............................Oxygenated . 403
........................Tank, Filling the . 225
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 386
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 231
..........................................Gasohol . 403
.........................................Gasoline . 224
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 224
........................Tank, Filling the . 225
................Gas Station Procedures . 225
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70
...............................................Fuel . 70
...............................Speedometer . 68
.................................Tachometer . 68
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 248
5-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 243
6-speed Manual
.........................Transmission . 245
..............................Glass Cleaning . 360
........................................Glove Box . 93
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.....................................(GVWR) . 264
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 394
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 82
...........................................Switch . 84
............Timing Control System . 406
........................Immobilizer System . 83
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61
...............................Infant Restraint . 21
......................................Infant Seats . 30
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 42
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 333
.................................Inside Mirror . 108
.............................Inspection, Tire . 335
............................Instrument Panel . 61
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76
...........................Interior Cleaning . 358
...............................Interior Lights . 117
........................................Introduction . i
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
........................Jacking up the Car . 367
.......................................Jack, Tire . 366
................................Jump Starting . 373
..................................................Keys . 82
.......................Label, Certification . 394
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 77
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 46
.........................Leather, Cleaning . 359
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 342
.......................................Indicator . 61
.........................................Parking . 74
..................................Turn Signal . 77
.....................................Load Limit . 235
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 84
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 84
............................Fuel Fill Door . 225
....................................Glove Box . 93
...........................................Trunk . 91
................Low Coolant Level . 230, 299
Lower Gear, Downshifting
......................................to a . 243, 245
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 379
Lubricant Specifications
..................................Chart . 396, 398
.........................................Luggage . 234
...................Neutral Gear Position . 250
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 224
............Normal Shift Speeds . 244, 246
..................NOTICE, Explanation of . ii
...............Numbers, Identification . 394
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 224
.........................................Odometer . 69
Odometer/Outside Temperature
......................................Indicator . 69
...............................Odometer, Trip . 70
..................................Maintenance . 271
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 291
................................Record . 281, 289
......................Required Indicator . 71
..........................................Safety . 272
..............Schedule . 276-280, 284-288
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 381
..........Manual Transmission . 243, 245
Manual Transmission
...................................Fluid . 310, 311
...............................Meters, Gauges . 68
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 403
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 108
.......................................Moonroof . 107
......................Closing Manually . 384
...................................Operation . 107
Index
LM
N
O
J
K
V
Main Menu
＊
...................Radiator Overheating . 376
Radio/CD Sound
.......................System . 148, 163, 187
...........................Readiness Codes . 382
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 348
............................Rear Seat Access . 98
........................Rear Seat, Folding . 100
..........................Rear View Mirror . 108
.................Rear Window Defogger . 79
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 94, 97
Recommended Shift
................................Speeds . 244, 246
.............................Reminder Lights . 61
.......................Remote Transmitter . 87
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 316
..........................Engine Coolant . 301
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 330
................Engine Oil and Filter . 296
..........................................Fuses . 386
................................Light Bulbs . 342
............................Schedule . 276, 284
.......................Spark Plugs . 318, 321
...........................................Tires . 336
.............................Wiper Blades . 327
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 48
.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 230
...............................Restraint, Child . 21
..................Reverse Gear Position . 249
................................Rotation, Tire . 336
Oil
........................Change, How to . 296
..............Change, When to . 276, 284
......................Checking Engine . 228
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 379
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 295
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 85
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 404
............................Outside Mirrors . 108
.....................Outside Temperature . 69
....................Overheating, Engine . 376
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 291
..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 403
..............Panel Brightness Control . 76
........................Park Gear Position . 249
...........................................Parking . 253
...............................Parking Brake . 110
.................................Parking Lights . 74
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 253
.............................PGM-FI System . 406
..................Polishing and Waxing . 357
...................................Pollen Filter . 330
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 21
.......................Protecting Infants . 30
.......Protecting Larger Children . 38
.........Protecting Small Children . 34
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 42
.............................Using LATCH . 43
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 46
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 414
Index
R
S
P
VI
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
.................................Safety Features . 7
.....................................Airbags . 9, 49
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 46
...............Additional Information . 46
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 47
.....................................Cleaning . 359
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 16, 46
................................Maintenance . 48
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 46, 62
...................System Components . 46
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
..................................Seat Heaters . 102
........................Seats, Adjusting the . 94
............................Security System . 213
...................Select/Reset Knob . 69, 70
...............................Serial Number . 394
...................Service Intervals . 276, 284
...........................Service Manual . 415
.........Service Station Procedures . 225
..........Setting the Clock . 153, 171, 193
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 248
........................Shift Lock Release . 251
....................................Side Airbags . 51
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 51
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 53
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 52
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 52
...............................Signaling Turns . 77
....6-speed Manual Transmission . 245
.................................Fluid Level . 311
.......................................Shifting . 245
.......................Reverse Lockout . 246
.....................................Snow Tires . 338
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 356
................Sound System . 148, 163, 187
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 364
....................Specifications . 397, 399
........Spark Plugs, Replacing . 318, 321
...........Specifications Charts . 396, 398
................................Speed Control . 214
................Speed Limiter . 244, 246, 251
...................................Speedometer . 68
..........SRS, Additional Information . 49
...Additional Safety Precautions . 55
.....How Your Airbags Work . 49, 51
How Your SRS Indicator
.......................................Works . 52
........................SRS Components . 49
..................................SRS Service . 55
.............................SRS Indicator . 52, 63
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 85
.......................Starting the Engine . 241
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 242
................With a Dead Battery . 373
........Steam Coming from Engine . 376
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 80
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 84
Stereo Sound
.......................System . 148, 163, 187
...........................Storing Your Car . 354
........................................Sun Visor . 114
........................Sunglasses Holder . 116
Index
VII
Main Menu
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 55
.........................SRS Indicator . 52, 63
...................System Components . 49
..................................Synthetic Oil . 295
.....................................Tachometer . 68
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 348
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 363
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400
.....Emissions Control Systems . 405
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 403
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 407
.......................Temperature Gauge . 70
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 42
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 407
..........Time, Setting the . 153, 171, 193
....................................Timing Belt . 332
....................................Tire Chains . 338
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 365
...........................Tire Information . 402
...............................................Tires . 333
..............................Air Pressure . 333
.........................Checking Wear . 335
..........................Compact Spare . 364
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 400
......................................Inflation . 333
..................................Inspection . 335
...................................Replacing . 336
......................................Rotating . 336
...........................................Snow . 338
....................Specifications . 397, 399
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 365
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 263
................Emergency Wrecker . 391
..Traction Control System (TCS) . 258
...TCS Activation Indicator . 64, 259
......................TCS Indicator . 64, 258
...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 259
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
......................Automatic . 307, 308
Checking Fluid Level,
...........................Manual . 310, 311
..........Fluid Selection . 307, 310, 312
..............Identification Number . 395
.............Shifting the Automatic . 248
..........Shifting the Manual . 243, 245
.....................................Treadwear . 400
.......................................Trip Meter . 70
................................................Trunk . 91
....................Emergency Opener . 92
.........................................Hooks . 237
.................................Opening the . 91
...................Open Monitor Light . 65
....................................Turn Signals . 77
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 361
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 363
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 400
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 224
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 358
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 298
Index
U
T
VIII
Main Menu
＊
＊
................................Vanity Mirror . 115
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 235
.............Vehicle Dimensions . 396, 398
....Vehicle Identification Number . 394
.............................Vehicle Storage . 354
.................................................VIN . 394
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 359
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 295
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57
..................Warranty Coverages . 413
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 306
.....................................Operation . 79
.........................................Washing . 356
..................Waxing and Polishing . 357
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 80
............Alignment and Balance . 335
..........................Compact Spare . 364
......................................Wrench . 366
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 104
.....................................Cleaning . 360
................Operating the Power . 103
...........................Rear, Defogger . 79
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 77
.......................................Washers . 79
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 327
.....................................Operation . 77
....................................Worn Tires . 335
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 391
:U.S.only
Index
W
V
IX
Main Menu
5-speed manual transmission:
6-speed manual transmission:
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
5-speed/6-speed Manual
Transmission Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher. Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Capacity:
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
)2.3 US qt (2.2 )
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Front:
Rear:
All other models
Front:
Rear:
294
307 309
4-cylinder LX
EX-V6 with M/T
Front:
Rear:
310 311
313
315
Main Menu
